ga32 0543 20 ibm system n intro and planning guide

IBM System Storage N series

Introduction and Planning Guide

GA32-0543-22

��

Note:Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in “Notices” on page 251.

The following paragraph does not apply to any country (or region) where such provisions are inconsistent with locallaw.

INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUTWARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states (or regions) donot allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not applyto you.

Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality.

© Copyright IBM Corporation 2005, 2011.US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contractwith IBM Corp.

Contents

Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

Safety notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiiiSafety notices and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Danger notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiiiLabels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xivCaution notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvAttention notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv

Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviUsage restrictions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi

Rack safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviiRack installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviiSafety inspection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviiRack relocation (19" rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx

Relocating the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiFire suppression systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

About this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiiWho should read this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiiSupported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiiHow this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiiiNotices and statements used in this document. . . . . . . . . . . . . xxivGetting information, help, and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv

Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvUsing the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvWeb sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvHardware service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvSupported servers and operating systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviFirmware updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi

Terminology and conventions used in this document . . . . . . . . . . xxviActive/active and high-availability terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviStorage terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviiCommand conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviiFormatting conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviiiKeyboard conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii

How to send your comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system . . . . . . . . 1IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion units . . . . . . . . . 1Storage expansion unit support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Intermixing EXN units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Connecting storage expansion units to N series systems . . . . . . . . . 3

Storage expansion unit cabling requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Data ONTAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Adapter support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6High availability or active/active configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9N3300 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

N3300 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011 iii

N3300 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Connecting storage expansion units to the N3300 . . . . . . . . . . . 10N3300 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

N3400 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13N3400 A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13N3400 A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Connecting storage expansion units to the N3400 . . . . . . . . . . . 14N3400 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

N3600 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16N3600 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16N3600 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Connecting storage expansion units to the N3600 . . . . . . . . . . . 17N3600 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

N3700 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU

modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Connecting storage expansion units to the N3700 . . . . . . . . . . . 22N3700 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

N5200 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23N5200 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24N5200 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Connecting storage expansion units to the N5200 filer . . . . . . . . . 26N5200 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

N5200 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28N5200 G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28N5200 G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30N5200 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30


N5300 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35N5300 Model G10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35N5300 Model G20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36N5300 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37


N5500 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42N5500 G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42N5500 G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44N5500 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44


N5600 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50N5600 Model G10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50N5600 Model G20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

iv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51N5600 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

N6040 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52N6040 Model A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53N6040 Model A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Connecting storage expansion units to the N6040 . . . . . . . . . . . 54N6040 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56



N6210 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66N6210 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Connecting storage expansion units to the N6210 . . . . . . . . . . . 68N6210 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

N6240 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70N6240 models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Connecting storage expansion units to the N6240 . . . . . . . . . . . 72N6240 feature codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

N7700 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74N7700 A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74N7700 A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Connecting storage expansion units to the N7700 filer . . . . . . . . . 76Connecting an N7700 gateway to external storage. . . . . . . . . . . 77N7700 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

N7900 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79N7900 A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79N7900 A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Connecting storage expansion units to the N7900 filer . . . . . . . . . 81Connecting an N7900 gateway to external storage. . . . . . . . . . . 82N7900 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . 83EXN1000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84




Rack mount requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features . . . . . . . 89Software packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Software bundles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94IBM N series controller software feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98IBM N series host software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Chapter 4. Site planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111System connectivity requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Fibre Channel connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents v

Ethernet connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Using older cables with PCI-X and PCIe 10GBASE-SR cards . . . . . . 113

Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirements . . . . . . . . . 114Balancing the load across PDUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Examples of balancing the load with a single component . . . . . . . 114Examples of balancing the load with two components . . . . . . . . 115

Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal console . . . . . . . . . . 116ASCII terminal console wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter pin connections . . . . . . . . . . . 117Connecting to an ASCII terminal console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118How the measurements are made . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Converting watts to volt-amps (VA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Important information about ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 119N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . 119N3700 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131N5000 series system hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 133N6000 series system hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 137N6200 series hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142N7000 series hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145EXN1000 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 150EXN3000 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Important factors to consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Rack considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Power supplies and power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157System input power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Primary computer power service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Computer room emergency power-off controls . . . . . . . . . . . 159Lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Three-phase power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Thermal considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Floor-loading specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Floor plan considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Creating a floor plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Chapter 5. Cable planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163General considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Cable measuring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Cable labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Chapter 6. AutoSupport. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167How does AutoSupport work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Interaction with mail hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Subject line of AutoSupport e-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Short e-mail messages for urgent events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Recipients of AutoSupport e-mail messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Technical Support response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Cluster considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Recommended AC power line sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

vi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems . . . . . . . 171FRU/CRU list for N series products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Power cord list for N series products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Appendix C. Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks . . . . . . . . 1752101 Model N00 rack specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1752101 Model N42 rack specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767014 Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Model T00 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Model T42 Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178T00 and T42 service clearances and caster location. . . . . . . . . . 178T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading . . . . . . . . . 180

Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBM rack 184

Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 . . . . . . 187Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . 187Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . 187Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014) . . . . . . . . . 188Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015). . . . . . . . . 188Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . 188Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . 189Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . 189Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) 189Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) . . . . . 189SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036). . . . . . . . . . 190Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter (FC 1060). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Single-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1062) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC

1063) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC

1064) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) (FC 1003) . . . . . . . . . . 193Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004). . . . . . . . 194Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005) . . . . . . . 194Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and MetroCluster

filer) (FC 1006) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007) . . . . . . . 195Single-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10-GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1008) . . . . 196Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) (FC 1009) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) . . . . . . . . . 196Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) . . . . . . . . . 196SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD Tape Adapter (FC 1016) . . . . . . . . 197Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC

1018) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019). . . . . . . . . . 197Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1020) . . . . . . . . 198Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for Disk (FC 1027) . . . . . . . . 198SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Contents vii

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . 202Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . 202Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . . . 202Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . 203Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017). . . . . . . . . . 203Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . 204Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . . . . . 204Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tape attachment (FC 1029) 205

Support and cabling rules for the HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Cabling rules for stand-alone controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) . . . . . 206Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032). . . . . . 206SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) 207

Support and cabling rules for the HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Cabling rules for stand-alone controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036). . . . . . . . . . 20816-GB Performance Accelerator module (PCIe) (FC 1056) . . . . . . . . 208256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC


1064) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems 211Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . 212Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . 212Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . . . 212Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . 213Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017). . . . . . . . . . 213Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . 214Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . . . . . 214Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) 214Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) . . . . . . . . 215Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21/A22 only) (FC 1032) . . . . 216SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) 216Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036). . . . . . . . . . 21716 GB Performance Acceleration Module (FC 1056). . . . . . . . . . . 217512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC


1064) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

viii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems 221Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . 222Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . . . 222Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . 222Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017). . . . . . . . . . 223Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . 223Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) . . . . 224Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030) . . . . . . . . 224Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) 225Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036). . . . . . . . . . 225512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC


1064) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2278-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066). . . . . . . . . . 2278-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067) . . . . . . . . . 228

Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 229PCI-X Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007) . . . . . . 229Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009) . . . . . . . . . . 230Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) . . . . . . . . 230Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) . . . . . . . . 230SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016) . . . . . . . 231SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) . . . . . . . . . . . 231

PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . 232Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . 233Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . . 233Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . 233Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017). . . . . . . . . 234Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . 234Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . 234Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . 235Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC

1029) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) . . . . 235Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21 only) (FC 1032) . . . . . 236SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . 236Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC

1035) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036) . . . . 23716-GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) . . . . . . . . . 238512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical) (FC

1063) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper) (FC

1064) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Contents ix

Appendix J. Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module 241System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

First time installations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Replacement or additional module installations. . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module . . . . . . . . 242Enabling the WAFL extended cache software license and functionality . . . . 243Enabling the WAFL extended cache configuration options . . . . . . . . 243Completing the replacement process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Appendix K. IBM System Storage N series documentation . . . . . . . 245N7000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245N6000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245N5000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage systems library . . . . . . . . . . . 245N3700 storage system library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units library 245Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Data ONTAP 7.3 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Data ONTAP 7.2 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Data ONTAP 7.1 library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Data ONTAP 7.2 and later gateway systems library . . . . . . . . . . . 249Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Other N series and N series-related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A Statement . . . . . 253Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement . . . . . . . 253Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada . . . . . . . 253European Union EMC Directive Conformance Statement . . . . . . . . 253Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . . . . . . . . . . 254People's Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement . . . . 255Japan VCCI Council Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)

Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)

Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Korea Communications Commission (KCC) Statement . . . . . . . . . 255Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A Statement . . . . . . 256Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Taiwan Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

x IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Figures

1. Ground check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix2. Port labeling for early N3700 CPU module designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213. Port labeling for current N3700 CPU module designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224. LC connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115. 10Base-T/100Base-T/1000Base-T NICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126. 1000Base-SX NICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137. PSUs on opposite sides of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148. PSUs on the same side of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

10. PSUs on opposite sides of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11511. PSUs on the same side of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11612. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11613. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16014. Service clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks. . . . . . . . . . . . 17915. Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17916. Top view of non-IBM rack specifications dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18117. Rack specifications dimensions, top front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18218. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011 xi

xii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Safety notices

This section contains information about:

v “Safety notices and labels”

v “Laser safety” on page xvi

v “Rack safety” on page xvii

v “Fire suppression systems ” on page xxi

For information about environmental notices, see the IBM® Environmental Noticesand User Guide, Z125-5823.

Safety notices and labelsWhen using this product, observe the danger, caution, and attention noticescontained in this guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent theseverity of the safety condition.

The following sections define each type of safety notice and provide examples.

The following notices and statements are used in IBM documents. They are listedbelow in order of increasing severity of potential hazards. Follow the links for moredetailed descriptions and examples of the danger, caution, and attention notices inthe sections that follow.

v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.

v “Attention notices” on page xv: These notices indicate potential damage toprograms, devices, or data.

v “Caution notices” on page xv: These statements indicate situations that can bepotentially hazardous to you.

v “Danger notices”: These statements indicate situations that can be potentiallylethal or extremely hazardous to you. Safety labels are also attached directly toproducts to warn of these situations.

v In addition to these notices, “Labels” on page xiv may be attached to the productto warn of potential hazards.

Danger noticesA danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremelyhazardous to people. A lightning bolt symbol accompanies a danger notice torepresent a dangerous electrical condition. A sample danger notice follows.

DANGER

An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could placehazardous voltage on metal parts of the system or the devicesthat attach to the system. It is the responsibility of the customerto ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded toprevent an electrical shock.

A comprehensive danger notice provides instructions on how to avoid shockhazards when servicing equipment. Unless instructed otherwise, follow theprocedures in the following danger notice.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011 xiii

DANGER

Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, andcommunication cables are hazardous.

To avoid a shock hazard:

v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or performinstallation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this productduring an electrical storm.

v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and groundedelectrical outlet. Ensure outlet supplies proper voltage andphase rotation according to the system rating plate.

v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product toproperly wired outlets.

v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnectsignal cables.

v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire,water, or structural damage.

v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunicationssystems, networks, and modems before you open the devicecovers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation andconfiguration procedures.

v Connect and disconnect cables as described below wheninstalling, moving, or opening covers on this product orattached devices.

To Disconnect:

1. Turn everything OFF (unless instructed otherwise).

2. Remove power cords from the outlet.

3. Remove signal cables from connectors.

4. Remove all cables from devices.

To Connect:

1. Turn everything OFF (unless instructed otherwise).

2. Attach all cables to devices.

3. Attach signal cables to connectors.

4. Attach power cords to outlet.

5. Turn device ON.

LabelsAs an added precaution, safety labels are often installed directly on products orproduct components to warn of potential hazards.

The actual product safety labels may differ from these sample safety labels:

DANGER

Hazardous voltage, current, or energy levels are presentinside any component that has this label attached.

Do not service, there are no serviceable parts.

xiv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

DANGER

Multiple power cords

To remove all power to the device, disconnect all power cords.

Caution noticesA caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to peoplebecause of some existing condition. A caution notice can be accompanied bydifferent symbols, as in the examples below:

If the symbol is... It means...

A hazardous electrical condition with less severity thanelectrical danger.

A generally hazardous condition not represented by othersafety symbols.

A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in theproduct. Laser symbols are always accompanied by theclassification of the laser as defined by the U. S.Department of Health and Human Services (for example,Class I, Class II, and so forth).

Sample caution notices:

CAUTION:This product is equipped with a 3–wire (two conductors andground) power cable and plug. Use this power cable with a properlygrounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock.

CAUTION:Data processing environments can contain equipment transmittingon system links with laser modules that operate at greater thanClass 1 power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of anoptical fiber cable or open receptacle.

Attention noticesAn attention notice indicates the possibility of damage to a program, device, orsystem, or to data. An exclamation point symbol may accompany an attentionnotice, but is not required. A sample attention notice follows:

Attention: Do not bend a fibre cable to a radius less than 5 cm (2 in.);you can damage the cable. Tie wraps are not recommended for opticalcables because they can be easily overtightened, causing damage to thecable.

Safety notices xv

Laser safetyWhen using an NVRAM5 or NVRAM6 cluster media converter, the storage systemmust be installed in a restricted access location.

CAUTION:This product contains a Class 1M laser. Do not view directly with opticalinstruments. (C028)

This equipment contains Class 1 laser products, and complies with FDA radiationPerformance Standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J and the international laser safetystandard IEC 825-2.

CAUTION:Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting onsystem links with laser modules that operate at greater than Class 1power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an optical fibercable or open receptacle.

Attention: In the United States, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers thatcomply with the FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J.Internationally, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers that comply with IECstandard 825–1. Optical products that do not comply with these standards mayproduct light that is hazardous to the eyes.

Usage restrictionsThe optical ports of the modules must be terminated with an optical connector orwith a dust plug.

xvi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Rack safety

Rack installation

DANGER

v Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet.

v Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.

v To avoid hazardous conditions due to uneven mechanicalloading, always install the heaviest devices in the bottom ofthe rack cabinet. Always install servers and optional devicesstarting from the bottom of the rack cabinets.

v Rack-mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or workspace. Do not place any object on top of rack-mounteddevices.

v Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord. Besure to disconnect all power cords in the rack cabinet beforeservicing any device in the rack cabinet.

v Connect all devices installed in a rack cabinet to powerdevices installed in the same rack cabinet. Do not plug apower cord from a device installed in one rack cabinet into apower device installed in a different rack cabinet.

CAUTION:

v Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambienttemperatures will exceed the manufacturer's recommendedambient temperature for all your rack-mounted devices.

v Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised.Ensure that air flow is not blocked or reduced on any side, front,or back of a unit used for air flow through the unit.

v Consideration should be given to the connection of theequipment to the supply circuit so that overloading of thecircuits does not compromise the supply wiring or overcurrentprotection.

v To provide the correct power connection to a rack, refer to therating labels located on the equipment in the rack to determinethe total power requirement of the supply circuit.

v This drawer is a fixed drawer and should not be moved forservicing unless specified by manufacturer. Attempting to movethe drawer partially or completely out of the rack may cause therack to become unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of therack.

Safety inspection procedurePerform a safety inspection on the rack when any of the following conditions occur:

v The rack is inspected under a maintenance agreement.

v Service is requested and service has not recently been performed.

v An alterations-and-attachments review is performed.

v Changes have been made to the equipment that might affect the safe operationof the equipment.

Safety notices xvii

v External devices with an attached power cord are connected to the rack.

Be cautious of potential safety hazards that are not covered in the safety checks. Ifthe inspection indicates an unacceptable safety condition, the condition must becorrected before you can service the machine.

Note: It is the responsibility of the owner of the system to correct any unsafecondition.

Do the following safety checks:

1. If the rack is bolted down, ensure that the rack is firmly secured to the floor.

2. If the rack is not bolted down, ensure that the stabilizers are firmly attached toboth the bottom front and bottom rear of the rack.

CAUTION:The stabilizer must be firmly attached to the bottom front and bottomrear of the rack to prevent the rack from turning over when the filers orstorage expansion units are pulled out of the rack. Do not pull out orinstall any filer or storage expansion unit or feature if the stabilizer is notattached to the rack.

3. Check the covers for sharp edges and for damage or alterations that exposethe internal parts of the rack.

4. Check the covers for a proper fit to the rack. The covers should be in placeand secure.

5. Open the back door of the rack.

6. Perform the power-off procedure for the power distribution unit (PDU) that isinstalled in the rack.

7. Check for alterations or attachments. If there are any, check for obvious safetyhazards such as broken wires, sharp edges, or broken insulation.

8. Check the internal cables for damage.

9. Check for dirt, water, and any other contamination within the rack.

10. Check the voltage label on the back of the system unit to ensure that itmatches the voltage at the outlet.

11. Check the external power cable for damage.

12. Perform the following grounding checks:

a. With the external power cord connected to the system unit, check for 0.1ohm or less resistance between the ground plug on the external powercord plug and the metal frame. See Figure 1 on page xix.

xviii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

b. Using the appropriate probe, check for 0.1 ohm or less resistance betweenthe metal frame and the grounding pin on each of the power outlets oneach power distribution bus.

13. Check for the following conditions for each external device that has anattached power cord:

v Damage to the power cord.

v The correct grounded power cord.

v With the external power cord connected to the device, check for 0.1 ohm orless resistance between the ground lug on the external power cord plug andthe metal frame of the device.

14. Close the rear cover of the rack.

15. Perform the power-on procedure for the PDU that is installed in the rack.

Rear View

L1

L1

L1

RT000015

Figure 1. Ground check

Safety notices xix

Rack relocation (19" rack)

CAUTION:Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improvesrack stability during relocation. Follow these general guidelines whenever yourelocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or building:

v Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment starting atthe top of the rack cabinet. When possible, restore the rack cabinet to theconfiguration of the rack cabinet as you received it. If this configuration isnot known, you must do the following:

– Remove all devices in the 32U position and above.

– Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rackcabinet.

– Ensure that there are no empty U-levels between devices installed in therack cabinet below the 32U level.

– If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets,detach the rack cabinet from the suite.

– Inspect the route that you plan to take when moving the rack toeliminate potential hazards.

– Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of theloaded rack cabinet. Refer to the documentation that came with yourrack cabinet for the weight of a loaded rack cabinet.

– Verify that all door openings are at least 760 x 2030 mm (30 x 80 in.).

– Ensure that all devices, shelves, drawers, doors, and cables are secure.

– Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position.

– Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket installed on the rack cabinetduring movement.

– Do not use a ramp inclined at more than ten degrees.

– Once the rack cabinet is in the new location, do the following:

- Lower the four leveling pads.

- Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.

- If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet, repopulate the rackcabinet from the lowest position to the highest position.

– If a long distance relocation is required, restore the rack cabinet to theconfiguration of the rack cabinet as you received it. Pack the rackcabinet in the original packaging material, or equivalent. Also, lower theleveling pads to raise the casters off of the pallet and bolt the rackcabinet to the pallet.

For additional information, refer to the documentation for your rack cabinet.

xx IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Relocating the rackThe following safety notices apply to the procedures in this section.

CAUTION:Make sure that you do the following:

v Before you add or remove drawers, always have the leveling feet loweredand the front and rear stabilizer installed, or have the rack bolted to thefloor.

v Always install drawers at the bottom of the rack first.

v Always remove drawers from the top of the rack first.

v Always install the heaviest drawers on the bottom of the rack.

v Remove two or three drawers from the top of the rack before you relocateit.

v Never push on the sides of the rack.

Attention: If the rack has equipment located above EIA location 32, you mustremove the equipment in position 32 and above from the rack before you move it.Always remove the equipment from the top of the rack first.

Complete the following steps before you relocate a rack:

1. Turn off all power to the rack and the system that is installed.

2. Disconnect all power cables.

3. Make sure that the rack is either bolted down or has the stabilizers installedbefore continuing this procedure.

4. Before removing any drawers from the rack, ensure that the battery LEDs onthe controller units are NOT blinking. A blinking LED indicates that the batteriesare in use. To ensure that the batteries do not discharge during the relocationprocess, remove and reseat the battery packs before removing the drawer.

Complete the following steps to relocate the rack:

1. Unbolt the rack from the floor or remove the stabilizers.

2. Raise all the leveling feet.

3. Unlock each caster wheel by loosening the screw on the caster.

4. Move the rack to the new position.

5. Reposition the rack.

For additional information, refer to the documentation for your rack cabinet.

Fire suppression systemsA fire suppression system is the responsibility of the customer. The customer's owninsurance underwriter, local fire marshal, or a local building inspector, or both,should be consulted in selecting a fire suppression system that provides the correctlevel of coverage and protection. IBM designs and manufactures equipment tointernal and external standards that require certain environments for reliableoperation. Because IBM does not test any equipment for compatibility with firesuppression systems, IBM does not make compatibility claims of any kind nor doesIBM provide recommendations on fire suppression systems.

Safety notices xxi

xxii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

About this book

This document provides introductory and planning information for the following IBMSystem Storage® N series products:

v N3300, N3400, N3600 filers

v N3700 filers

v N5000 series filers and gateways (N5200, N5300, N5500, and N5600)

v N6000 series filers and gateways (N6040, N6060 and N6070)

v N6200 series filers and gateways (N6210 and N6240)

v N7000 series filers and gateways (N7700 and N7900)

v EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000, and EXN4000 storage expansion units

Note: This guide applies to systems, including systems with gateway functionality,running Data ONTAP 7.x and Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode. In the Data ONTAP8.x 7-Mode product name, the term 7-Mode signifies that the 8.x release hasthe same features and functionality found in the prior Data ONTAP 7.1, 7.2,and 7.3 release families.

Who should read this documentThis guide is for qualified system administrators and service personnel who arefamiliar with IBM storage systems. This document is for customer use. Thisdocument is intended to provide information to customers, operators, administrators,installers, and service personnel.

Supported featuresIBM System Storage N series storage systems and storage expansion units aredriven by NetApp® Data ONTAP® software. Some features described in the productsoftware documentation are neither offered nor supported by IBM. Please contactyour local IBM representative or reseller for further details.

Information about supported features can also be found at the following web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

A listing of currently available N series products and features can be found at thefollowing web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/nas/

How this document is organizedThis document contains the following chapters:

v Chapter 1, “Planning for the IBM N series storage system,” on page 1

v Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 9

v Chapter 3, “IBM N series storage system software features,” on page 89

v Chapter 4, “Site planning,” on page 111

v Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” on page 163

v Chapter 6, “AutoSupport,” on page 167

v Appendix A, “Recommended power line sizes,” on page 169

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011 xxiii

http://www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

http://www.ibm.com/storage/nas/

v Appendix B, “Power cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 171

v Appendix C, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 175

v Appendix D, “Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600,” on page 187

v Appendix E, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,”on page 193

v Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,”on page 201

v Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems,” onpage 211

v Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems,” onpage 221

v Appendix I, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” onpage 229

v Appendix J, “Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module,” on page241

v Appendix K, “IBM System Storage N series documentation,” on page 245

Notices and statements used in this documentThe caution and danger statements used in this document also appear in themultilingual IBM Safety Information document. Each caution and danger statementis numbered for easy reference to the corresponding statements in the safetydocument.

The following types of notices and statements are used in this document:

v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.

v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoidinconvenient or problem situations.

v Attention: These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, ordata. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in whichdamage could occur.

v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardousto you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentiallyhazardous procedure step or situation.

v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal orextremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before thedescription of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step orsituation.

Getting information, help, and serviceIf you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more informationabout IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM toassist you. This section contains information about where to go for additionalinformation about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problemwith your IBM System Storage N series product, and whom to call for service, if it isnecessary.

The following applies in Taiwan:

xxiv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Info:IBM Taiwan Corporation3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei TaiwanTel: 0800-016-888

Before you callBefore you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve theproblem yourself:

v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.

v Check the power switches to make sure that the system is turned on.

v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation and use thediagnostic tools that come with your system.

v Check the IBM support web site for known problems and limitations.

Using the documentationInformation about the N series product and Data ONTAP software is available inprinted documents and a documentation CD that comes with your system. Thesame documentation is available as PDF files on the IBM NAS support web site:


Web sitesIBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latesttechnical information and download device drivers and updates.

v For NAS product information, go to the following web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/nas/

v For NAS support information, go to the following web site:


v For AutoSupport information, go to the following web site:


v For the latest version of N series publications, go to the following web site:


Hardware service and supportYou can receive hardware service through IBM Integrated Technology Services.Visit the following web site for support telephone numbers:

www.ibm.com/planetwide/

About this book xxv


http://www.ibm.com/storage/nas/




http://www.ibm.com/planetwide

Supported servers and operating systemsIBM N series products attach to many servers and many operating systems. Todetermine the latest supported attachments, visit the following web site and accessthe IBM System Storage N series interoperability matrix:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Firmware updatesAs with all devices, it is recommended that you run the latest level of firmware,which is embedded in Data ONTAP. If there are changes, they will be posted to thefollowing web site:


Note: If you do not see new changes on the web site, you are running the latestlevel of firmware.

Verify that the latest level of firmware is installed on your machine before contactingIBM for technical support.

Terminology and conventions used in this documentThis guide uses the following terminology, command conventions, formatconventions and keyboard conventions.

In this document, the term gateway describes IBM N series storage systems thathave been ordered with gateway functionality. Gateways support various types ofstorage, and they are used with third-party disk storage systems. In this case, diskstorage for customer data and the RAID controller functionality is provided by theback-end disk storage system. A gateway might also be used with disk storageexpansion units specifically designed for the IBM N series models.

The term filer describes IBM N series storage systems that either contain internaldisk storage or attach to disk storage expansion units specifically designed for theIBM N series storage systems. Filer storage systems do not support usingthird-party disk storage systems. The following disk storage expansion units arespecifically designed for the IBM N series filers:

v IBM EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit

v IBM EXN3000 SAS/SATA disk storage expansion unit


v IBM EXN1000 Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) storageexpansion unit

The terms system or storage system refer to either a gateway by itself or a filer,either by itself or with additional disk drives.

Active/active and high-availability termsactive/active configuration

In the Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3 release families, refers to a pair of storagesystems (sometimes called nodes) configured to serve data for each other ifone of the two systems stops functioning. Also sometimes referred to asactive/active pairs.

xxvi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

http://www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html


clusterIn the Data ONTAP 7.1 release family, refers to a pair of storage systems(sometimes called nodes) configured to serve data for each other if one ofthe two systems stops functioning. In Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode, a cluster isa group of connected nodes (storage systems) that share a globalnamespace and that you can manage as a single virtual server or multiplevirtual servers, providing performance, reliability, and scalability benefits.

HA (high availability)In Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode, the recovery capability provided by a pair ofnodes (storage systems), called an HA pair, that are configured to servedata for each other if one of the two nodes stops functioning.

HA pairIn Data ONTAP 8.x, a pair of nodes (storage systems) configured to servedata for each other if one of the two nodes stops functioning.

Storage termsAT-FCX

The controller module of the EXN1000 serial advanced technologyattachment (SATA) storage expansion unit.

Disk Any hard disk drive

Disk shelf or shelfAny storage expansion unit containing hard disk drives.

ESH2 The controller module of the EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storageexpansion unit.

ESH4 The controller module of the EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storageexpansion unit.

IOM The Input/Output module of the EXN3000 SAS/SATA disk storageexpansion unit.

Loop or Fibre-Channel Arbitrated LoopOne or more daisy-chained EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 storageexpansion units connected to an N series storage system.

Node The system controller module that executes the software on an N seriessystem. There is one node in the C10 and E11 (single-controller) models;there are two nodes in the C20, C21 and E21 (active/active or highavailability) models.

Stack or SAS stacka stack of one or more EXN3000 storage expansion units using IOMmodules connected to the storage system. The maximum number ofstorage expansion units in a stack of storage expansion units and thenumber of storage expansion unit stacks in a configuration are dependenton the type of storage system.

Command conventionsYou can enter commands on the system console or from any client that can obtainaccess to the storage system using a Telnet session. In examples that illustratecommands executed on a UNIX workstation, the command syntax and output mightdiffer, depending on your version of UNIX.

About this book xxvii

Formatting conventionsThe following table lists different character formats used in this guide to set offspecial information.

Formatting convention Type of information

Italic type v Words or characters that require specialattention.

v Placeholders for information you mustsupply. For example, if the guide requiresyou to enter the fctest adapternamecommand, you enter the characters“fctest” followed by the actual name of theadapter.

v Book titles in cross-references.

Monospaced font v Command and daemon names.

v Information displayed on the systemconsole or other computer monitors.

v The contents of files.

Bold monospaced font Words or characters you type. What you typeis always shown in lowercase letters, unlessyour program is case-sensitive anduppercase letters are necessary for it to workproperly.

Keyboard conventionsThis guide uses capitalization and some abbreviations to refer to the keys on thekeyboard. The keys on your keyboard might not be labeled exactly as they are inthis guide.

What is in this guide... What it means...

hyphen (-) Used to separate individual keys. Forexample, Ctrl-D means holding down the Ctrlkey while pressing the D key.

Enter Used to refer to the key that generates acarriage return, although the key is namedReturn on some keyboards.

type Used to mean pressing one or more keys onthe keyboard.

enter Used to mean pressing one or more keysand then pressing the Enter key.

How to send your commentsYour feedback is important in helping us provide the most accurate and high-qualityinformation. If you have comments or suggestions for improving this document,send us your comments by e-mail to [email protected].

Be sure to include the following:

v Exact publication title

v Publication form number (for example, GC26-1234-02)

v Page, table, or illustration numbers

xxviii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

mailto:[email protected]?subject=IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide

v A detailed description of any information that should be changed

About this book xxix

xxx IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system

Successful installation of the IBM System Storage N series storage system requirescareful planning. You are the most valuable resource in site planning because youhave the most detailed understanding of how the N series storage system anddevices attached to it will be used.

Site preparation is the responsibility of the customer and this document will providebasic information required to do this preparation. You may want to also enlist thehelp of your Field Technical Support Specialist, marketing representative, or othersupport personnel.

Your marketing representative is available to ensure that the hardware and softwarethat you have chosen will meet your needs.

Planning for the IBM N series storage system consists of these main tasks:

1. Understanding the features and functions of the N series storage system andselecting the proper feature codes (FCs) for your business as described inChapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 9 and Chapter 3, “IBM Nseries storage system software features,” on page 89.

2. Planning for the physical environment where the equipment will operate. Thisplanning step includes the physical space, electrical, temperature, humidity,altitude, air flow, service clearance, and similar requirements as described inChapter 4, “Site planning,” on page 111.

3. Planning for cabling depends on the adapter feature codes (FCs) selected asdescribed in Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” on page 163.

4. If required, planning for a dual-node (active/active or high availability)configuration for as described in “High availability or active/active configurations”on page 7.

5. Planning for reporting error information to IBM as described in Chapter 6,“AutoSupport,” on page 167.

This chapter also introduces the following topics:

v “IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion units”

v “Storage expansion unit support” on page 2

v “Data ONTAP” on page 5

v “Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL)” on page 5

v “Interoperability” on page 6

v “Adapter support” on page 6

v “High availability or active/active configurations” on page 7

IBM N series storage systems and storage expansion unitsThe following IBM System Storage N series storage systems and storageexpansion units are described in Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” onpage 9.

v “N3300 hardware features” on page 9




© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2011 1

v “N5200 filer hardware features” on page 23

v “N5200 gateway hardware features” on page 28














v “EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware features” on page 83




Storage expansion unit supportThere are currently four N series disk storage expansion units specifically designedfor IBM N series systems:


v IBM EXN3000 SAS and SATA disk storage expansion unit (supported for N3400,N3600, N5300, N5600, N6040, N6060, N6070, N7700, and N7900 systems)


v IBM EXN1000 serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) storage expansionunit

Multiple EXN1000s, each having different SATA disk drive feature codes, may beattached to the same N series system on the same Fibre Channel loop.

Multiple EXN2000s and EXN4000s, each having different Fibre Channel disk drivefeature codes, may be attached to the same N series system on the same FibreChannel loop.

Within an EXN3000, SAS and SATA drives cannot be intermixed; the EXN3000 iseither a SAS storage controller or a SATA storage controller.

For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000 andEXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System StorageEXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide.

For the latest N series storage expansion unit support information, visit the followingweb site:


2 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Starting with Data ONTAP 7.3, gateway expands its support matrix to includestorage for native disk shelves and native disks. Gateways can now virtualizestorage from both third-party storage array venders and native disk shelves. TheData ONTAP software provides a unified storage software platform that simplifiesmanaging both native disk shelves and LUNs on storage arrays. You can addstorage when and where you need it, without disruption. See the GatewayImplementation Guide for Native Disk Shelves for additional information about thisfeature.

Intermixing EXN unitsEXN4000s and EXN2000s are both Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units.EXN4000 and EXN2000 storage expansion units can be mixed within the sameloop, but the speed switches on all EXN4000s and EXN2000s must be set to thesame speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps).

Intermixing Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in a supported N series systemconfiguration is supported as follows:

v Intermixing Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units with SATA disk storageexpansion units on the same loop is not supported.

v EXN4000s or EXN2000s (Fibre Channel disk drives) and EXN1000s (SATA diskdrives) may be attached to the same N series system only if the Fibre Channeldisk storage expansion units (EXN4000s or EXN2000s) are on separate loopsthan the SATA disk storage expansion units (EXN1000s).

Note: Intermixing Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in an N3700 configurationis not supported.

IBM N series systems that support SAS HBAs with Data ONTAP 7.3.2 or later alsosupport stacks of EXN3000s as well as Fibre Channel loops of EXN1000s,EXN2000s, and EXN4000s. A single EXN3000 storage expansion unit must containonly SAS disk drives or only SATA disk drives. However, a stack of EXN3000storage expansion units can contain storage expansion units with SAS disk drivesand storage expansion units with SATA disk drives.

Connecting storage expansion units to N series systemsThis section describes the requirements for connecting a storage expansion unit toN series systems and other storage expansion units. For detailed instructions abouthow to install and connect one or more storage expansion units in a rack, or toconnect a storage expansion unit to your filer storage system, refer to theInstallation and Setup Instructions and the Hardware and Service Guide for your Nseries controllers and storage expansion units.

v IBM strongly recommends using optical (Fibre Channel) cabling wheneverpossible.

v Refer to Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 9 for details aboutthe maximum number of drive loops, maximum number of storage expansionunits or hard disk drives per loop, maximum total storage capacity, and maximumtotal number of hard disk drives for configurations using your N series system.

v Multipath looping is recommended for all configurations to provide additionalredundancy. This includes single or dual controller and single or multiple storageexpansion units.

v Do not mix Fibre Channel EXN2000s/EXN4000s and SATA EXN1000 storageexpansion units in the same loop.

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system 3

v EXN4000 and EXN2000 storage expansion units can be mixed within the sameloop, but the speed switches on all EXN4000s and EXN2000s must be set to thesame speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps).

v For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000 andEXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System StorageEXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide.

Note: One optical cable feature code order provides two cables. One SFP featurecode order provides two SFPs.

Storage expansion unit cabling requirementsYou must meet the cabling requirements discussed in the following sections whenconnecting the storage expansion unit to an N series system or to other storageexpansion units.

For the latest information on cabling requirements, see Installation and SetupInstructions and the Hardware and Service Guide for your storage system.

Connecting the storage expansion unit to the N series system: For EXN1000,EXN2000, and EXN4000:

When connecting EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000 storage expansion units to anN series system, you must use appropriate cables and connectors according to thefollowing guidelines.

v For direct connections to N3700 storage systems with early CPU moduledesigns: Use a NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cable (#2020 or 2022). Forattachment to an N3700 Model A10, one NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel coppercable is required. For attachment to an N3700 Model A20, two NAS-to-EXP FibreChannel copper cables are required.

v For direct connections to N3700 storage systems with current CPU moduledesigns: Use an LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable and two SFPs forattachment to an N3700 Model A10. Use two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel opticalcables and four SFPs for attachment to an N3700 Model A20.

v For direct connections to all other N series systems: Use LC-to-LC FibreChannel optical cables and SFPs.

Note: For information about the differences between early and late CPU moduledesigns, see “Understanding the differences between early and currentN3700 CPU modules” on page 21.

For EXN3000:

For information about cabling EXN3000s, see the IBM System Storage EXN3000Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide.

Connecting the storage expansion unit to other storage expansion units: ForEXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000:

When connecting a storage expansion unit to other storage expansion units, IBMstrongly recommends using two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and fourSFPs (two SFPs per LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable).

Note: SFP-to-SFP Fibre Channel copper cables may also be used for connections(to a maximum of three meters) between storage expansion units.


You must order one cable feature code and two SFP feature codes per storageexpansion unit.

For EXN3000:

Connections between EXN3000s are made using SAS cables. For informationabout cabling EXN3000s, see the IBM System Storage EXN3000 StorageExpansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide.

Connecting a gateway to external storageYou must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a FibreChannel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices foryour gateway system.


Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

Data ONTAPN series storage systems are driven by the Data ONTAP operating system. DataONTAP is a highly optimized, scalable, and flexible operating system that canhandle mixed SAN and NAS environments. Data ONTAP delivers flexiblemanagement and high availability, ensures business continuance, and provides datapermanence, thereby reducing storage management complexity in your enterprise.Data ONTAP software integrates seamlessly into UNIX, Windows, and webenvironments and provides the foundation to build your storage infrastructure andan enterprise-wide data fabric for mission-critical business applications. Theoperating system includes integrated secure access capabilities (SSL, SSH) andFilerView, a web-based element manager.

The innovative Data ONTAP architecture delivers scalable performance and aflexible storage environment, that can be applied in many environments rangingfrom small workgroups to enterprise data centers. Data ONTAP stores and servesapplications, consolidates data, and provides reliable data access throughout theenterprise. The Data ONTAP operating system simplifies management andoptimizes storage utilization by combining file-system technology and a microkerneldesign, enabling such features as flexible data management, scalability, andheterogeneous access.

Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL)The WAFL (Write Anywhere File Layout) file system contributes to a high level ofdata availability while providing dynamic and flexible data storage containers usingFlexible Volume technology as well as data protection using integrated, nonvolatileRAM and a block-level checksum capability. The WAFL file system is designedspecifically to work in an NFS appliance. The primary focus is on the algorithmsand data structures that WAFL uses to implement Snapshots, which are read-onlyclones of the active file system. WAFL uses a copy-on-write technique to minimizethe disk space that Snapshots consume.



InteroperabilityThe latest information on software and hardware interoperability can be accessedat:


Adapter supportMost IBM System Storage N series controller models feature PCI adapter slots.Adapters must be added in pairs, one per node, to dual-controller models, so thatboth nodes are populated with the same number of each type of PCI adapters.

There are no PCI adapter slots on the N3300, N3400 and N3700 systems. Noadditional adapter options are supported for the N3300, N3400 and N3700 systems.

There is one available PCIe adapter slot per node on the N3600 storage system.The PCIe adapters supported by the N3600 are described in Appendix D, “Optionaladapter cards supported by the N3600,” on page 187.

There are three available PCI-X adapter slots per node on the N5200 and N5500storage systems. (A10/G10 models have three available PCI-X adapter slots.A20/G20 models have six available PCI-X adapter slots.) The PCI-X adapterssupported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems are described in Appendix E,“Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,” on page 193.

There are three available PCIe adapter slots per node on the N5300 and N5600storage systems. (A10/G10 models have three available PCIe adapter slots.A20/G20 models have six available PCIe adapter slots.) The PCIe adapterssupported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are described in Appendix F,“Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,” on page 201.

There are five available PCIe adapter slots and three available PCI-X adapter slotsper node on the N7700 and N7900 storage systems. (The sixth PCIe adapter sloton each N7700 or N7900 node is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter and is notavailable for PCIe adapter card use). The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported bythe N7700 and N7900 storage systems are described in Appendix I, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” on page 229.

There are three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slot per nodeon the N6000 series storage systems. The PCIe adapters supported by the N6000series storage systems are described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cardssupported by N6000 series systems,” on page 211.

There are two PCIe expansion slots per controller node on the N6200 seriesstorage systems. N6240 Exx models also contain an I/O expansion module percontroller node that provides additional PCIe slots. The I/O expansion is notavailable on N6210 Cxx models. The PCIe adapters supported by the N6200 seriesstorage systems are described in Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported byN6200 series systems,” on page 221.



High availability or active/active configurationsBefore beginning hardware planning, decide if the higher availability obtained byclustering two N series storage system nodes is needed. These higher availabilityconfigurations are referred to as HA (high availability) pairs in Data ONTAP 8.0, asactive/active configurations in Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3, and as clusteredconfigurations in Data ONTAP 7.1.

An HA pair (or active/active configuration) consists of two storage systems (nodes)whose controllers are connected to each other either directly or, in the case of afabric-attached MetroCluster, through switches and FC-VI interconnect adapters.You can configure the HA pair so that each node in the pair shares access to acommon set of storage, subnets, and tape drives, or each node can own its owndistinct set of storage. The nodes are connected to each other through a NVRAMadapter, or, in the case of systems with two controllers in a single chassis, throughan internal interconnect. This allows one node to serve data that resides on thedisks of its failed partner node. Each node continually monitors its partner, mirroringthe data for each other’s nonvolatile memory (NVRAM or NVMEM).

Two N series storage system nodes can be clustered together for higher availabilityusing the Cluster Failover (CFO) software feature.

The IBM N3300, N3400, N3600, N3700, and N6000 series systems all contain bothclustered (active/active or high availability) nodes in the same enclosure.

Dual-controller IBM N6200 series models that do not include Input/Outputexpansion modules contain both nodes in the same enclosure. Dual-controller IBMN6200 series models that do include Input/Output expansion modules containcontroller nodes in separate enclosures.

In all IBM N5000 and N7000 series models, a standard active/active or highavailability configuration contains two nodes, with each node contained in a differentenclosure. Both nodes must be the same N series model. The two nodes areclustered through an Infiniband (IB) cluster cable that is attached to the NVRAM5adapter (for N5200 and N5500 models) or NVRAM6 adapter (for N5300, N5600 andN7000 series models), which allows one node to serve data to the disks of its failedpartner node.

Configuring storage systems in an HA pair (or active/active configuration) providesthe following benefits:

v Fault tolerance

When one node fails or becomes impaired, a takeover occurs, and the partnernode continues to serve the failed node’s data.

v Nondisruptive software upgrades

When you halt one node and allow takeover, the partner node continues to servedata for the halted node while you upgrade the node you halted. For moreinformation about nondisruptive upgrades, see the IBM System Storage N seriesData ONTAP Upgrade Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.

v Nondisruptive storage system and disk maintenance

When you halt one node and allow takeover, the partner node continues to servedata for the halted node while you replace or repair hardware in the node youhalted.


More information about active/active or high availability configurations is provided inthe following documents:

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 High Availability ConfigurationGuide

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Active/Active Configuration Guide

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Active/Active Configuration Guide

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation andAdministration Guide

v IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP-4243-00


Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features

This chapter describes the hardware features for the following N series products.

v “N3300 hardware features”























This chapter also provides rack mounting information in “Rack mount requirements”on page 88.

N3300 hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N3300 storage controller includes the Model A10, asingle-node base unit, and the Model A20, an active/active dual-node base unit.Both models are designed to provide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocolsupport, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements.

The N3300 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmissionin the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include theIBM Eserver System p®, System i® (NFS only), System x® and System z® (NFSonly) servers. Details and current information on N3300 interoperability is availableat:


For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel, Fibre Channelover Ethernet, and iSCSI, refer to the IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channeland iSCSI Configuration Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.



N3300 A10The N3300 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller withiSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3300Model A10 is a 2U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The base chassis includes:

v One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processor

v 1 GB random access ECC memory

v Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports

v One serial console port

v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port

v Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans

v Support for 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

The N3300 Model A10 may be upgraded to an N3300 Model A20. The upgradefrom a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N3300 A20The N3300 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3300 ModelA10, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and theClustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 consists of two PCMsthat are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. The Model A20 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller.

The N3300 Model A20 includes:

v Two 2.2 GHz 32-bit processors


v Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel ports

v Two serial console ports

v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports



Connecting storage expansion units to the N3300The N3300 storage controller supports both the EXN1000 Serial AdvancedTechnology Attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit, and the EXN2000 andEXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. The maximum number of storageexpansion units that may be attached to either the Model A10 or A20 is four.

Note: The N3300 does not support attachment of EXN3000 storage expansionunits.

The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technologyattachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB,or 2 TB physical capacities.


The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U rack-mountabledisk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channeldisk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel diskdrive speeds and capacities:

v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB and 600GB capacities

v 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities

Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 disk drives, all of aparticular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBMSystem Storage N3300, you may not include storage expansion units containingmore than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

Table 1 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for theN3300 Model A10 and Model A20.

Table 1. N3300 raw storage capacity

Disk enclosureDisk drivecapacity

Maximumstorageenclosures

Maximum diskdrives

Maximumphysicalcapacity1

Internal 144 GB SASdisk drives

n/a 12 1.72 TB


n/a 12 3.60 TB


n/a 12 5.40 TB


n/a 12 7.20 TB

Internal 500 GB SATAdisk drives

n/a 12 6 TB


n/a 12 9 TB

Internal 1 TB SATA diskdrives

n/a 12 12 TB


n/a 12 24 TB

EXN1000 250 GB SATAdisk drives

4 56 14 TB


4 56 42 TB

EXN1000 1 TB SATA diskdrives

4 56 56 TB


4 28 56 TB

EXN2000 144 GB FibreChannel diskdrives

4 56 8.06 TB


4 56 16.8 TB

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 11

Table 1. N3300 raw storage capacity (continued)



Maximum diskdrives



4 56 8.06 TB


4 56 16.8 TB


4 56 25.2 TB


4 56 33.6 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3300 system is determined by the maximumnumber of disk drives supported (68, including 12 internal drives and 56 drives in storageexpansion units) and a maximum physical storage limit of 68 TB. Both limits must behonored.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop withEXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units.

N3300 feature codesTable 2. N3300 feature codes

Description Machine Model Feature

Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2859 A10, A20 1044

31m 50-micron Fibre Channelcable (LC/LC)

2859 A10, A20 1051

4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2859 A10, A20 2011

144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4014

300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4015

450 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4016

600 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4017

500 GB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4018

750 GB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4019

1 TB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4020

2 TB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4021

HDD Blank Panel 2859 A10, A20 4099

Table 3. N3300 installation features codes


Field install rack mount kit 2859 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N3300 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord list forN series storage systems,” on page 171.


N3400 hardware features

The IBM System Storage N3400 storage controller includes the Model A11, asingle-node base unit, and the Model A21, an active/active (or high availability)dual-node base unit. The two models of the N3400 are designed to provide fastdata access, simultaneous multiprotocol support, expandability, upgradability, andlow maintenance requirements. Additional functions, such as snapshot, mirroring,and business continuance capability, are available through optional licensedfunctions.

The N3400 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmissionin the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include theIBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only)servers. Details and current information on N3400 interoperability is available at:



N3400 A11The N3400 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller withiSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3400Model A11 is a 2U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The base chassis includes:

v Two 1.66 GHz Intel dual-core Xeon LV processors




v One SAS port - Quad Small Form Factor Pluggable (QSFP)




v Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

The N3400 Model A11 may be upgraded to an N3400 Model A21. The upgradefrom a Model A11 to a Model A21 is a disruptive upgrade.

N3400 A21The N3400 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N3400 ModelA11, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and theClustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A21 consists of two PCMsthat are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. The Model A21 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller.


v Four 1.66 GHz Intel dual-core Xeon LV processors


v Eight integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Four integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports



v Two SAS ports -- Quad Small Form Factor Pluggable (QSFP)


v Four integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports


v Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

Connecting storage expansion units to the N3400The N3400 storage controller Models A11 and A21 can attach a maximum of eightSerial Advanced Technology Attachment (SATA) or Fibre Channel storageexpansion units, either EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000. The maximum number ofEXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion units that can be attached is four. On theinitial order of an N3400, either SAS-attached or Fibre Channel-attached expansionunits may be ordered, not both. For an initial order, no more than six FibreChannel-attached expansion units may be ordered.

Both N3400 models support either one backend FC loop (for EXN1000, EXN2000,or EXN4000 storage expansion units) or one SAS stack (for EXN3000 storageexpansion units).

The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technologyattachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB,or 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not sharea Fibre Channel loop with EXN2000 and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units.

The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable diskenclosures containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel diskdrives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre Channel disk drivespeeds and capacities:

v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600GB capacities


The EXN3000 storage expansion unit is a 4U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining 5, and up to a maximum of 24, SAS or SATA disk drives. The supporteddisk drives are:

v SAS: 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacities

v SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB physical capacities

Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 (24 for SAS) disk drives, allof a particular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBMSystem Storage N3300, you may not include storage expansion units containingmore than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.



Diskenclosure Disk drive capacity


Maximumdisk drives


Internal 300 GB SAS disk drives n/a 12 3.60 TB






Maximumdisk drives



Internal 500 GB SATA disk drives n/a 12 6 TB

Internal 1 TB SATA disk drives n/a 12 12 TB

Internal 2 TB SATA disk drives n/a 12 24 TB

EXN1000 250 GB SATA disk drives 8 112 28 TB



EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk drives 8 112 112 TB

EXN1000 2 TB SATAdisk drives

In a systemrunning DataONTAP 7.3.x

8 56 136 TB


8 112 272 TB

EXN3000 300 GB SAS disk drives 4 96 28.80 TB







4 48 136 TB


4 96 272 TB

EXN4000 andEXN2000

144 GB Fibre Channel diskdrives

8 112 16.12 TB

EXN4000 andEXN2000


8 112 33.60 TB

EXN4000 450 GB Fibre Channel diskdrives

8 112 50.40 TB


8 112 67.20 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3400 system is determined by the maximumnumber of disk drives supported (136) and a maximum physical storage limit of 136 TB.Both limits must be honored.





Table 5. N3400 feature codes (continued)



2859 A11, A21 1051

4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2859 A11, A21 2011

144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A11, A21 4014

300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A11, A21 4015

450 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A11, A21 4016

600 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A11, A21 4017

500 GB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A21 4018

750 GB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A21 4019

1 TB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A21 4020

2 TB SATA HDD 2859 A11, A21 4021






N3600 hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N3600 storage controller includes the Model A10, asingle-node base unit, and the Model A20, an active/active dual-node base unit.Both models are designed to provide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocolsupport, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements.

The N3600 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmissionin the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include theIBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only)servers. Details and current information on N3600 interoperability is available at:



N3600 A10The Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSIsupport, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3600 ModelA10 is a 4U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.The base chassis includes:

v One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processor


v Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports








The Model A10 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop or SASstack.

The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 4 gigabit Ethernet ports viathe addition of one optional dual-port Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012 or 1013).

The Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N3600 A20The Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3600 Model A10,but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and theClustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 also supports amaximum of 104 drives. The Model A20 consists of two PCMs that are designed toprovide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. The ModelA20 is a 4U rack-mountable storage controller.

The Model A20 includes:




v Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel ports

v Two PCIe expansion slots





For the Model A20, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is two(one per node).

The Model A20 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop or SASstack.

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of eight gigabit Ethernet ports viathe addition of two optional dual-port gigabit Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012 or1013).

Connecting storage expansion units to the N3600The EXN1000 storage expansion unit is a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technologyattachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB,or 2 TB physical capacities. EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not sharea Fibre Channel loop with EXN2000 and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units.


Note: EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channelloop with EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units.






v SATA: 500 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB physical capacities

For the initial order of the N3600, you may not include storage expansion unitscontaining more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.





Maximum diskdrives



n/a 20 2.88 TB


n/a 20 6.00 TB


n/a 20 9.00 TB


n/a 20 12 TB


n/a 20 10 TB


n/a 20 15 TB


n/a 20 20 TB


6 84 21.00 TB


6 84 42.00 TB


6 84 63.00 TB


6 84 84 TB


6 42 84 TB





Maximum diskdrives


EXN3000 300 GB SASdrives

6 84 25.20 TB


6 84 37.80 TB


6 84 50.4 TB

EXN3000 500 GB SATAdrives

6 84 42.00 TB

EXN3000 1 TB SATAdrives

6 84 84 TB


6 42 84 TB

EXN4000 andEXN2000

144 GB FibreChannel diskdrives

6 84 12.09 TB

EXN4000 andEXN2000

300 GB FibreChannel diskdrives

6 84 25.20 TB


6 84 37.80 TB


6 84 50.4 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3600 Model A10 and Model A20 is determinedby the maximum number of disk drives supported (104, 20 internal and 84 via storageexpansion units) and a maximum physical storage limit of 104 TB. Both limits must behonored.

N3600 feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N3600 cables, connectors, and harddisk drives. For a list of the HBA feature codes supported for the N3600, seeAppendix D, “Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600,” on page 187.

Table 8. N3600 feature codes




2862 A10, A20 1051

1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 2862 A10, A20 1053



FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1m

2862 A10, A20 1071


2862 A10, A20 1072





2862 A10, A20 1073

4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2862 A10, A20 2011

144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4014

300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4015

450 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4016

600 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4017

500 GB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4018

750 GB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4019

1 TB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4020






N3700 hardware featuresThe N3700 consists of the Model A10 or Model A20, and its associated software.

The Model A10 is designed to provide a single node filer with NFS, CIFS, iSCSIand FCP support in a 3U, integrated filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. Thisbase chassis includes redundant hot-plug power supplies with fans and twointegrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports.

The N3700 Model A10 is capable of being upgraded to an N3700 Model A20. TheModel A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3700 Model A10, butwith the addition of the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The N3700Model A20 consists of two processing nodes in the same enclosure that aredesigned to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall reliability.

The N3700 can be configured with as few as four disk drives in the Model A10 andeight in the Model A20, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (28 disk drives in theA20). Disk drive types include 72 GB (10,000 or 15,000 RPM), 144 GB (10,000 or15,000 RPM), and 300 GB (10,000 RPM). Within any single N3700, all disk drivesmust be of the same type.

Note: Any N3700 drive bays that do not contain hard disk drives must bepopulated with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering the remainingdrive bays.

The N3700 load board feature enables the N3700 (A10 and A20) to operate in aSATA-only storage environment. If the N3700 load board is ordered, the N3700 isordered with no Fibre Channel hard drives and only EXN1000s (SATA drives) are


attached to the storage controller. For more information about the N3700 loadboard, see “Connecting storage expansion units to the N3700” on page 22.

Attention: If your N3700 storage system shipped with load boards, exactly twoN3700 load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD blank fillers (FC 4099) are installed inthe system. The two load boards must be installed in bays 0 and 1.


Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPUmodules

N3700 storage systems with system serial numbers between 13-00001 and13-01000 shipped with an early CPU module design. (In general, these are N3700systems that shipped prior to January 31, 2006.) Current N3700 systems (withsystem serial numbers 13-01001 and higher) ship with the current CPU moduledesign, which uses different Fibre Channel connectors. (In general, these areN3700 systems that shipped after January 31, 2006.)

Regardless of the CPU module design, all N3700 storage systems offer the samefunctionality. Field repairs or upgrades may use the current CPU module design onany N3700 system.

The early CPU module is easily distinguished from the current CPU module designby the rear port labeling, shown in Figure 2. The early CPU module uses anintegrated SFP for Fibre Channel Port C (used for third-party devices), and it uses aspecial HSS connector for Fibre Channel Port B to connect the N3700 to storageexpansion units.

The current CPU module design uses pluggable SFP connections for both FibreChannel ports. The current CPU module labeling is shown in Figure 3 on page 22.The SFP required for connections to the Fibre Channel Port C (used for third-partydevices) is included with all N3700s that ship with the current CPU module design.For Port B (used for connections to storage expansion units), an SFP is requiredonly for connections using optical cables (recommended). The SFP for Port B isshipped with the cables ordered with your storage expansion unit.

Figure 2. Port labeling for early N3700 CPU module designs


Attention: Depending on the design of your N3700 CPU module, directconnections to storage expansion units must be made with either Fibre Channelcopper cables or Fibre Channel optical cables, as described in the following bullets:

v For direct connections to N3700 early CPU module designs: UseNAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cables (FC 2020 or 2022). For attachment toan N3700 Model A10, one NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cable is required.For attachment to an N3700 Model A20, two NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel coppercables are required.

v For direct connections to N3700 current CPU module designs: Use anLC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable and two SFPs for attachment to an N3700Model A10. Use two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and four SFPs forattachment to an N3700 Model A20.

Connecting storage expansion units to the N3700Physical capacity of the N3700 can be scaled up to 16.8 TB with the attachment ofup to three IBM System Storage N series EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000storage expansion units.

An N3700 storage system configuration supports a maximum of 56 disk drives(including the possible fourteen disk drives in the N3700). The maximum rawphysical storage capacity of 16.8 TB includes the capacity of any internal drives inthe N3700.


v EXN4000 storage expansion units can be configured with as few as four diskdrives, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives of 144 GB, 300 GB,450 GB or 600 GB physical capacity.

v EXN2000 storage expansion units can be configured with as few as four diskdrives, up to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives of 72 GB, 144 GB, 300GB, 450 GB or 600 GB physical capacity.

v EXN1000 storage expansion units can be configured with a minimum of five, upto a maximum of 14, SATA disk drives of the same capacity. SATA disk drives areavailable in 250 GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, and 1 TB capacities.

Note: Any storage expansion unit drive bays that do not contain hard disk drivesmust be populated with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering theremaining drive bays.

The N3700 does not support the attachment of mixed storage expansion unit types.All storage expansion units connected to a single N3700 must be either EXN4000s,EXN2000s or EXN1000s.

Figure 3. Port labeling for current N3700 CPU module designs


Attention: Depending on the CPU module design of your N3700 storage system,direct connections to storage expansion units must be made with either FibreChannel copper cables or Fibre Channel optical cables, as described in“Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU modules” onpage 21.

If you are attaching EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units to the N3700, theN3700 base unit must either:

v have the minimum number of Fibre Channel disk drives installed (four for aModel A10 and eight for a Model A20); or

v have two N3700 load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD blank fillers (FC 4099)

In the case where the objective is to have as much low cost SATA storage aspossible, the N3700 can be configured with no Fibre Channel disk drives. In orderto configure the N3700 system (the base unit and storage expansion units) with noFibre Channel disk drives, you must order two HDD load boards (FC 4020) and 12HDD blank fillers (FC 4099).




2863 A10, A20 1051

72 GB, 10K RPM Fibre ChannelHDD

2863 A10, A20 4000


2863 A10, A20 4001


2863 A10, A20 4002


2863 A10, A20 4003


2863 A10, A20 4004

N3700 load board 2863 A10, A20 4020

Drive Blank Cover 2863 A10, A20 4099




The power cord features for the N3700 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cordlist for N series storage systems,” on page 171.

N5200 filer hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N5200 filers consist of the Model A10 and Model A20,and associated software.

The N5200 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of datatransmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These


include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5200 interoperability isavailable at:



N5200 A10The N5200 Model A10 is designed to provide a single node filer with NFS, CIFS,FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

The N5200 Model A10 does not include storage in the base chassis. The basechassis includes:

v One Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processor

v 2 GB of ECC memory

v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets orinitiators

v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans

v Redundant cooling fans

v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)

v Front LCD message display

For the N5200 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters isthree.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systemsare described in Appendix E, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200and N5500 systems,” on page 193.

The Model A10 can have a maximum of four dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channelstorage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, andEXN4000). On the Model A10, in order to have the maximum number of dual-pathFibre Channel storage loops, two additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for DiskAttachment (FC 1004) are needed. The four onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel portscan be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storage expansion units(EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attaching to FibreChannel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre ChannelSAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCP targets,then more than two dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004)are required to reach the maximum of four dual-path Fibre Channel storage loopsfor disk storage expansion units.

The Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsvia the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network Interfacecards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via theaddition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number1007).




N5200 A20The N5200 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5200 ModelA10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) software feature. The Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that aredesigned to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.


v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, one per node

v 4 GB of ECC memory, 2 GB per node

v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node

v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node

v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can beconfigured as targets or initiators

v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node


v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node(always ordered and installed in pairs)

v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, betweenthe two processing N5000 nodes


For the N5200 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters issix.


The Model A20 can have a maximum of eight dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channelstorage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, andEXN4000). On the Model A20, in order to have the maximum number of dual-pathFibre Channel storage loops, four additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for DiskAttachment (FC 1004), two per node, are needed. The onboard 2-Gbps FibreChannel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storageexpansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attachingto Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a FibreChannel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCPtargets, then more than four dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC1004) are required to reach the maximum of eight dual-path Fibre Channel storageloops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5200 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernetports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optionalquad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).


The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (withrespect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cablesare ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (featurenumbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting storage expansion units to the N5200 filerThe N5200 filer Models A10 and A20 require at least one storage expansion unitper node, either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.


Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 storage expansion unit, all diskdrives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the originalorder for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no morethan two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades toadd additional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

Table 12 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for boththe N5200.

Table 12. N5200 filer raw storage capacity


Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum disk

drives


EXN1000 250 GB SATA diskdrives

12 168 42 TB


12 168 53.76 TB


12 168 84 TB


12 168 126 TB


12 168 168 TB


12 84 168 TB


12 168 12.09 TB


12 168 24.19 TB


12 168 50.40 TB


12 168 24.19 TB


12 168 50.40 TB


Table 12. N5200 filer raw storage capacity (continued)


Maximumstorage


drives



12 168 75.60 TB


12 168 100.80 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5200 system is determined by the maximumnumber of disk drives supported (168) and a maximum physical storage limit of 168 TB.Both limits must be honored.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channelstorage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of sixstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on asingle Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5200 filer. Dual-path FibreChannel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability ofthe storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating tworedundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansionunits. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see theInstallation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N5200 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5200 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5200, see Appendix E, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,” on page 193.

Table 13. N5200 filer feature codes


2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1037

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1040


Copper-Fiber Converter 2864 A20 1042


30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable 2864 A10, A20 1047

Extended long-wave SFP (4-Gbps) 2864 A20 1050


2864 A10, A20 1051

Table 14. N5200 filer installation features codes





N5200 gateway hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N5200 gateways consist of the Model G10 and ModelG20, and associated software.

The N5200 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of datatransmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Theseinclude the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5200 interoperability isavailable at:


Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This supportrequires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disksand N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support alsoenables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization ongateways when used with N series storage only. These features are not besupported on third-party storage devices.



N5200 G10The N5200 Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS,CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

The N5200 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. Thebase chassis includes:

v One Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processor









For the N5200 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters isthree.




The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiatorsfor attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channelapplication hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN).

The Model G10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsvia the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network Interfacecards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via theaddition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number1007).

N5200 G20The N5200 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5200 ModelG10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that aredesigned to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountablegateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5200 Model G20 includes:

v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, one per node










For the N5200 Model G20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters issix.



The Model G20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet portsvia the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional quad-portcopper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (withrespect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables


are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (featurenumbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.


See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices foryour N5000 series gateway.



N5200 gateway feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5200 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5200, see Appendix E, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,” on page 193.

Table 15. N5200 gateway feature codes


2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1037

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1040


Copper-Fiber Converter 2864 G20 1042

30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable 2864 G10, G20 1047

4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 2864 G20 1050


2864 G10, G20 1051

Table 16. N5200 gateway installation features codes


Field install rack mount kit 2864 G10, G20 9202

The power cord features for the N5200 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Powercord list for N series storage systems,” on page 171.

N5300 filer hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N5300 filers consist of the Model A10 or Model A20, andassociated software.

The N5300 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of datatransmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Theseinclude the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5300 interoperability isavailable at:






N5300 A10The N5300 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. TheN5300 Model A10 does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This basechassis includes:








v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host BusAdapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)




All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For theN5300 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three. Afourth expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N5300) 512 MBNVRAM adapter card.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 storage system are described inAppendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600systems,” on page 201.

The Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of five dual-path Fibre Channelloops (10 Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of three optional Fibre ChannelHBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014). The five loops will support amaximum of 252 total disk drives.

The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 16 gigabit Ethernet ports viathe addition of three optional quad-port copper NICs (feature number 1023).

The Model A10 may be upgraded to an N5300 Model A20. The upgrade from aModel A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 or N5500 storage system to anN5300 storage system.

N5300 A20The N5300 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)software feature. The Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that aredesigned to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall


availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.Therefore, the N5300 Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.


v Four 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors

v 8 GB of DDR-400 ECC memory

v 1 GB (512 MB per node) of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets orinitiators



v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host BusAdapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)




All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For theN5300 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is six.


The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path Fibre Channelloops (20 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of six optional Fibre ChannelHBA for Disk Attachments (feature number 1014). The ten loops will support amaximum of 252 total disk drives.

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 32 Gigabit Ethernet ports via theaddition of six optional quad-port copper gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number1023).


Connecting storage expansion units to the N5300 filerBoth N5300 filer models require the addition of at least one N series storageexpansion unit.

Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of aparticular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order for storageexpansion units may contain storage expansion units with no more than twodifferent types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to addadditional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

Table 17 on page 33 describes the maximum supported total physical storagecapacity for the N5300.




Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives







In systemsrunning DataONTAP 7.3.x

24 168 336 TB


24 336 672 TB

EXN3000 300 GB SAS drives 24 336 100.8 TB



EXN3000 500 GB SATA drives 24 336 168 TB

EXN3000 1 TB SATA drives 24 336 336 TB



24 168 336 TB


24 336 672 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


24 336 48.384 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


24 336 100.8 TB


24 336 151.2 TB


24 336 201.6 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5300 is determined by the maximum numberof disk drives supported (336) and a maximum physical storage limit of 336 TB in systemsrunning Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 672 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x. Both limitsmust be honored.


An EXN3000 SAS stack can contain a maximum of ten EXN3000 storageexpansion units. The maximum number of supported EXN3000 stacks and totalEXN3000 storage expansion units depends upon the storage controllerconfiguration.



N5300 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5300 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5300, see Appendix F, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,” on page 201.


Feature Code Description Machine ModelFeatureCode






30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernetcable

2869 A10, A20 1047

4-Gbps Extended Long-waveSFP

2869 A20 1050


2869 A10, A20 1051

1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 2869 A10, A20 1053



FCoE SFP+ active copper cable,1 m2

2869 A10, A20 1071


2869 A10, A20 1072


2869 A10, A20 1073

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP 1 2869 A10, A20 20121 FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter).2 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.

Table 19. N5300 filer installation feature codes






The Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS, CIFS, FCPand iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The ModelG20 provides an active/active (or high availability) dual-node base unit.

The N5300 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of datatransmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Theseinclude the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5300 gatewayinteroperability is available at:


Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This supportrequires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disksand N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support alsoenables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization ongateways when used with IBM N series storage only. These features are notsupported on third-party storage devices.


N5300 Model G10The N5300 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. Thebase chassis includes:

v Two AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors (per node), each with 1 MB of level2 cache

v Four GB random access ECC memory

v Up to five backend Fibre Channel loops per node


v 252 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20

v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansionHBA features)






All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For theN5300 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems aredescribed in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 andN5600 systems,” on page 201.



The Model G10 may be upgraded to a Model G20. The upgrade from a Model G10to a Model G20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5300 Model G20The N5300 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5300 ModelG10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that aredesigned to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountablegateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.


v Four AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors (per node), each with 1 MB oflevel 2 cache

v Eight GB random access ECC memory

v Up to ten backend Fibre Channel loops

v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)






v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host BusAdapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three pernode (always ordered and installed in pairs)



All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. The maximumnumber of adapters that may be added to the N5300 Model G20 is six. Whenadapter cards are ordered for the Model G20 on the initial order, they must beordered and added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated withthe same number of each type of PCIe adapters.


The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (withrespect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cablesare ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (featurenumbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.


See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices foryour N5000 series gateway system.




N5300 gateway feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5300 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5300, see Appendix F, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,” on page 201.







Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2869 G10, G20 1044




2869 G10, G20 1051

1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable2 2869 G10, G20 1053



FCoE SFP+ active copper cable, 1m2

2869 G10, G20 1071


2869 G10, G20 1072


2869 G10, G20 1073

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP 1 2869 G10, G20 20121 FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter).2 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.






The N5500 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of datatransmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These



include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5500 interoperability isavailable at:



N5500 A10The N5500 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. TheN5500 filer does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassisincludes:

v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors









For the N5500 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters isthree.


The N5500 Model A10 can have a maximum of four dual-path (redundant) FibreChannel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000,and EXN4000). On the Model A10, in order to have the maximum number ofdual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, two additional dual-port Fibre ChannelHBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004) are needed. The onboard 2-Gbps FibreChannel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storageexpansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attachingto Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a FibreChannel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCPtargets, then more than two dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC1004) are required to reach the maximum of four dual-path Fibre Channel storageloops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5500 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernetports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NetworkInterface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports viathe addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1007).




N5500 A20The N5500 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)software feature. The N5500 Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that aredesigned to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 storage system to an N5500 storagesystem.


v Four Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, two per node








v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, betweenthe two processing nodes


For the N5500 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters issix.


The N5500 Model A20 can have a maximum of eight dual-path (redundant) FibreChannel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000,and EXN4000). On the Model A20, in order to have the maximum number ofdual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, four additional dual-port Fibre ChannelHBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004), two per node, are needed. The onboard2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attachingdisk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targetsfor attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or througha Fibre Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configuredas FCP targets, then more than four dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for DiskAttachment (FC 1004) are required to reach the maximum of eight dual-path FibreChannel storage loops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5500 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernetports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature


number 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optionalquad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).


Connecting storage expansion units to the N5500 filerBoth N5500 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.


Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 storage expansion unit, all diskdrives must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the originalorder for storage expansion units may contain storage expansion units with no morethan two different types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades toadd additional storage expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

Table 22 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for theN5500.



Maximumstorage


drives



24 336 84 TB


24 336 107.52 TB


24 336 168 TB


24 336 259 TB


24 336 336 TB


24 168 336 TB


24 336 24.19 TB


24 336 48.38 TB


24 336 100.8 TB


24 336 48.38 TB




Maximumstorage


drives



24 336 100.8 TB


24 336 151.2 TB


24 336 201.6 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5500 Model is determined by the maximumnumber of disk drives supported (336) and a maximum physical storage limit of 336 TB.Both limits must be honored.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channelstorage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of sixstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on asingle Fibre Channel loop.


N5500 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5500 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5500, see Appendix E, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,” on page 193.







30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernet cable 2865 A10, A20 1047

Extended long-wave SFP (4-Gbps) 2865 A20 1050


2865 A10, A20 1051

FCoE SFP+ copper cable, 1 m 2865 A10, A20 1053




2865 A10, A20 1071


Table 23. N5500 filer feature codes (continued)



2865 A10, A20 1072


2865 A10, A20 1073





N5500 gateway hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N5500 gateways consist of the Model G10 or Model G20,and associated software.




N5500 G10The N5500 Model G10 is designed to provide a single-node gateway with NFS,CIFS, FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The N5500 gateway does not include disk storage in the base chassis. Thisbase chassis includes:

v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors










For the N5500 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters isthree.



The N5500 Model G10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit EthernetNetwork Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernetports via the addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs(feature number 1007).

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 storage system to an N5500 storagesystem.

N5500 G20The N5500 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model G10,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)software feature. The N5500 Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that aredesigned to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.


v Four Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, two per node










For the N5500 Model G20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters issix.




The N5500 Model G20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernetports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (featurenumber 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optionalquad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).






N5500 gateway feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5500 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5500, see Appendix E, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,” on page 193.










2865 G10, G20 1051

Table 26. N5500 gateway installation feature codes







The N5600 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of datatransmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Theseinclude the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5600 interoperability isavailable at:



N5600 A10The N5600 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. TheN5600 filer does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassisincludes:












For the N5600 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters isthree. A fourth expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N5600)512 MB NVRAM adapter card.


The N5600 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of five dual-path FibreChannel loops (10 Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of three optional FibreChannel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014). The five loops willsupport a maximum of 420 total disk drives.

The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 16 gigabit Ethernet ports viathe addition of three optional quad-port copper NICs (feature number 1023).




Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 or N5500 storage system to anN5600 storage system.

N5600 A20The N5600 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)software feature. The N5600 Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that aredesigned to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.


v Four 1.8 GHz 64-bit processors


v 1 GB (512 MB per node) of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)

v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports




v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host BusAdapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)




For the N5600 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters issix.


The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path Fibre Channelloops (20 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of six optional Fibre ChannelHBA for Disk Attachments (feature number 1014).

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 32 Gigabit Ethernet ports via theaddition of six optional quad-port copper gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number1023).





The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5600 Model is determined by themaximum number of disk drives supported (504) and a maximum physical storagelimit of 504 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 1008 TB in systemsrunning Data ONTAP 8.0.x. Both limits must be honored.

Table 27. N5600 raw storage capacity (without redundant cabling)


Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives








36 252 504 TB


36 504 1008 TB








36 252 504 TB


36 504 1008 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


36 504 72.57 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


36 504 151.2 TB


36 504 226.8 TB


36 504 302.4 TB



Table 28. N5600 raw storage capacity (with redundant cabling)


Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives








24 168 336 TB


24 336 672 TB








24 168 336 TB


24 336 672 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


24 336 48.38 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


24 336 100.8 TB


24 336 151.2 TB


24 336 201.6 TB

1 In a system with redundant cabling, the maximum raw storage capacity of the N5600 isdetermined by the maximum number of disk drives supported (504) and a maximumphysical storage limit of 504 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 1008 TB insystems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x. Both limits must be honored.





N5600 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5600 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5600, see Appendix F, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,” on page 201.








30m 10-Gbps Fibre Ethernetcable

2868 A10, A20 1047

Extended long-wave SFP(4-Gbps)

2868 A20 1050


2868 A10, A20 1051





2868 A10, A20 1071


2868 A10, A20 1072


2868 A10, A20 1073








The N5600 Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS,CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.The N5600 Model G20 provides an active/active (or high availability) dual-nodebase unit.

The N5600 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of datatransmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. Theseinclude the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z(NFS only) servers. The most current information on N5600 gateway interoperabilityis available at:


Mixed disk/LUN support is available on N series gateway systems. This supportrequires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher and enables the use of both third-party disksand N series storage expansion units on N series gateways. This support alsoenables SnapLock Compliance, LockVault Compliance, and Disk Sanitization ongateways when used with N series storage only. These features are not besupported on third-party storage devices.


N5600 Model G10The N5600 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. Thebase chassis includes:

v Two AMD 1.8 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache

v 8 GB of DDR-400 memory

v Up to five backend Fibre Channel loops per node









All the adapter card slots of the N5600 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For theN5600 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three.




The Model G10 may be upgraded to a Model G20. The upgrade from a Model G10to a Model G20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5600 Model G20The N5600 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5600 ModelG10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that aredesigned to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountablegateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.


v Four AMD 1.8 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache


v Up to ten backend Fibre Channel loops



v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (20 with the addition of expansionHBA features)




v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host BusAdapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three pernode (always ordered and installed in pairs)



All the adapter card slots of the N5600 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. The maximumnumber of adapters that may be added to the Model G20 is six. When adaptercards are ordered for Model G20 on the initial order, they must be ordered andadded in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the samenumber of each type of PCIe adapters.








N5600 gateway feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N5600 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N5600, see Appendix F, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,” on page 201.







Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2868 G10, G20 1044


4-Gbps Extended long-wave SFP 2868 G20 1050


2868 G10, G20 1051





2868 G10, G20 1071


2868 G10, G20 1072


2868 G10, G20 1073

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP 1 2868 G10, G20 20121 FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter).2 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.





N6040 hardware featuresThe N6040 storage controllers consist of the Model A10 and Model A20 andassociated software with gateway options. The N6040 is a 6U storage controllerthat must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N6040 storage controllerdoes not include storage in the base chassis.



Note: All N6040 models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used asgateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with thesuffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW).

The IBM System Storage N6040 storage controllers are designed to interoperatewith products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS,FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFSonly), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices foryour N series filer system.



N6040 Model A10The N6040 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller withiSCSI support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features.

The N6040 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The N6040 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis.The base chassis includes:

v One dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processor

v 4 GB of random access ECC memory

v Two integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Four integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports

v Dual redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans

v Three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slot



The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6040 Model A10 isfour.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N6040 storage systems are describedin Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems,”on page 211.

The N6040 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path (loop A andloop B) Fibre Channel loops via the addition of four optional Fibre Channel HBAsfor Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The Model A10 supports amaximum of 420 total disk drives.

The N6040 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernet portsvia the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interfacecards (NICs) (feature number 1023).

The N6040 Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from aModel A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.



N6040 Model A20The N6040 Model A20 is designed to provide a dual-node storage controller withiSCSI support and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features.

The N6040 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function to the Model A10,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)licensed function. The Model A20 supports a maximum of 420 drives. The ModelA20 consists of two storage controllers housed in a single chassis, 6U in height.They are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability.

The base chassis includes:

v Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (one per node)

v 8 GB of random access ECC memory (4 GB per node)

v Four integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (two per node)

v Eight integrated 4-Gbps SFP Fibre Channel ports (four per node)


v Six PCIe X8 expansion slots (three per node) and two PCIe X4 expansion slots(one per node)

v Two serial console ports (one per node)

v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports (one per node)

The maximum number of additional expansion adapters for the N6040 Model A20 iseight (four per node).


The N6040 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 dual-path (loop A andloop B) Fibre Channel loops (20 4-Gbps FC ports) via the addition of eight optionalFibre Channel HBAs for Disk/Tape Attachment (feature number 1029). The ModelA20 supports a maximum of 420 total disk drives.

The N6040 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 36 Gigabit Ethernet portsvia the addition of eight optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NetworkInterface cards (NICs) (feature number 1023).

Connecting storage expansion units to the N6040Both N6040 models require the addition of at least one N series storage expansionunit per node.


The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units are 3U rack-mountable diskenclosures containing a minimum of five, up to a maximum of fourteen, FibreChannel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following FibreChannel disk drive speeds and capacities:





v SAS: 144 GB, 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GB physical capacities

v SATA: 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, and 2 TB physical capacities





Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives








30 210 420 TB


30 420 840 TB

EXN3000 300 GB SAS drives 30 420 126 TB







30 210 420 TB


30 420 840 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


30 420 60.48 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


30 420 126 TB




Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives



30 420 189 TB


30 420 252 TB


EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channelstorage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of sixstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on asingle Fibre Channel loop.


Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6040 system. Dual-pathFibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceabilityof the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating tworedundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansionunits. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see theInstallation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N6040 feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N6040 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6040, see Appendix G, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N6000 series systems,” on page 211.

v Appendix I, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” onpage 229




30m 50-micron MMF cable(LC/SC)

2858 A10, A20 1047

4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2858 A10 1050


2858 A10, A20 1051








2858 A10, A20 1071


2858 A10, A20 1072


2858 A10, A20 1073


Table 35. N6040 installation feature codes


Plant install in 2101 rack 2858 A10, A20 9201













v One dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processor





v Three PCI-e X8 expansion slots and one PCI-e X4 expansion slot






The N6060 Model A12 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernet portsvia the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interfacecards (NICs) (feature numbers 1023).



The N6060 Model A22 is designed to provide identical function to the Model A12,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)licensed function. The Model A22 consists of two storage controllers housed in asingle chassis, 6U in height. They are designed to provide failover and failbackfunction, helping improve overall availability.


v Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (one per node)




















v SATA: 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB physical capacities





Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives






Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives







48 336 672 TB


48 672 1344 TB








48 336 672 TB


48 672 1344 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


48 672 100 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


48 672 201 TB


48 672 302 TB


48 672 403 TB




Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N6060 system. Dual-pathFibre Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability


of the storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating tworedundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansionunits. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see theInstallation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.






2858 A12, A22 1047



2858 A12, A22 1051





2858 A12, A22 1071


2858 A12, A22 1072


2858 A12, A22 1073
















v Two dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors





v Three PCIe X8 expansion slots and one PCIe X4 expansion slot






The N6070 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 18 Gigabit Ethernet portsvia the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interfacecards (NICs) (feature number 1023).





The N6070 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function to the Model A11,but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)licensed function. The Model A21 supports a maximum of 420 drives. The ModelA21 consists of two storage controllers housed in a single chassis, 6U in height.They are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overallavailability.


v Four dual-core AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors (two per node)

























Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives








60 420 840 TB


60 840 1680 TB








60 420 840 TB


60 840 1680 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


60 840 120.96 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


60 840 252 TB


60 840 378 TB


60 840 504 TB




Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives











2858 A11, A21 1047



2858 A11, A21 1051





2858 A11, A21 1071


2858 A11, A21 1072


2858 A11, A21 1073

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP 1 2858 A11, A21 2012




1 FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter).2 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.






N6210 hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N6210 storage controllers are designed to interoperatewith products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS,FCP and NFS protocols. Supported systems include the IBM Eserver System p,System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers.

The N6210 systems consist of the Model C10, Model C20, and associatedsoftware. Both models can be configured, via optional features, to be either storagecontrollers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include Clustered Failover (CFO)support (via required feature), designed to provide failover and failback function,helping improve overall availability. Both models must be mounted in a standard19-inch rack. None of the N6210 models include storage in the base chassis.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices foryour N series system.



N6210 modelsIBM System Storage N6210 storage controllers include:

v Model C20 - An active/active dual-node base unit

v Model C10 - A single-node base unit

The Model C10 can be upgraded to a Model C20; model upgrades are disruptive.

Each chassis is a 3U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The N6210 storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis.

Note: All these models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used asgateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with thesuffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW).

Both N6210 models feature:



v High data availability and system-level redundancy designed to address theneeds of business-critical and mission-critical applications

v Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and fileserving over Ethernet and Fibre Channel SAN infrastructures

v High throughput and fast response times for database, email, and technicalapplications

v Support of enterprise customers requiring unified access to Network AttachedStorage (NAS) via Fibre Channel (FC) or Internet Small Computer SystemInterface (iSCSI)

v Attachment of Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and SerialAdvanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk expansion units designed to allowdeployment in multiple environments, including data retention, NearStore,disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/Ointensive operations

All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN2000and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, and the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansionunit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system.

Table 42. N6210 physical attributes

Attribute C10 C20

Number of controllers 1 2

Rack space required 3U 3U

Dual core 2.3 GHz CPU 1 2

Random access memory (GB) 4 8

4-Gb Fibre Channel ports 2 4

6-Gb SAS ports 2 4

Disk drives supported 240 240

1-Gb Ethernet ports 2 4

PCIe expansion slots 2 4

Serial console ports 1 2

LAN management (RLM) ports 1 2

Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes Yes

Optional HBA features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note thateach platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed.

Attribute C10 C20

FC loops 10 10

FC loops (dual-path) 5 5

SAS stacks 5 n/a

SAS stacks (dual-path) n/a 4

10-Gb Ethernet ports 4 8

10-Gb FCoE ports 4 8

EXN1000 storage expansion units 17 17




Attribute C10 C20


Connecting storage expansion units to the N6210The N6210 storage controllers may be ordered without an accompanying expansionunit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. TheEXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement.

The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining five, and up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology attachment(SATA) disk drives, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities.

The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U rack-mountabledisk enclosure containing five, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk drives. Theysupport FC disk drives of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm),450 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000rpm).




Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of aparticular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM SystemStorage N series, orders for EXNx000 expansion units may not include more thantwo types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

The maximum raw storage capacity of N6210 systems is determined by the numberof disk drives supported. N6210 systems support a maximum of 240 hard drivespindles.

The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storagecapacity for the N6210:



Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives

Maximumphysicalcapacity


EXN1000 750 GB SATA disk drives 17 238 178.5 TB




17 119 238 TB

In systemsrunning DataONTAP 8.07-Mode andhigher

17 238 476 TB





Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives








20 120 240 TB


20 240 480 TB

EXN4000 300 GB Fibre Channel disk drives 17 238 180 TB



EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop withEXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of sixstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on asingle Fibre Channel loop.


Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for N6210 systems. Dual-path FibreChannel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability ofthe storage expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating tworedundant paths from each storage controller to each loop of the storage expansionunits. For more information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see theInstallation and Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N6210 feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N6210 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6210, see Appendix H, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N6200 series systems,” on page 221.



Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 C10, C20 1044


2858 C10, C20 1051

5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable1 2858 C10, C20 1055

NIC SFP+ 2858 C10, C20 2012




10-Gbps Ethernet SFP+ 2858 C10, C20 20131 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.


N6240 hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage N6240 storage controllers are designed to interoperatewith products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS,FCP and NFS protocols. Supported systems include the IBM Eserver System p,System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers.

The N6240 systems consist of the Model C21, Model E11, Model E21, andassociated software. All models can be configured, via optional features, to beeither storage controllers or gateways. Dual-node configurations include ClusteredFailover (CFO) support (via required feature), designed to provide failover andfailback function, helping improve overall availability. All N6240 models must bemounted in a standard 19-inch rack. None of the N6240 models include storage inthe base chassis.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices foryour N series system.



N6240 modelsIBM System Storage N6240 storage controllers include:

v Model C21 - An active/active dual-node base unit

v Model E11 - A single-node base unit

v Model E21 - The coupling of two Model E11s

Exx models contain an I/O expansion module that provides additional PCIe slots.The I/O expansion is not available on Cxx models.

The Model E11 can be upgraded to a Model E21; model upgrades are disruptive.

Each chassis is a 3U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The N6240 storage controllers do not include storage in the base chassis.

Note: All these models may be configured as gateways. If they are to be used asgateways, all Licensed Function Indicator features must be those with thesuffix, GW (for example, SnapRestore - GW).

All N6240 models feature:



v High data availability and system-level redundancy designed to address theneeds of business-critical and mission-critical applications

v Single, integrated architecture designed to support concurrent block I/O and fileserving over Ethernet and Fibre Channel SAN infrastructures

v High throughput and fast response times for database, email, and technicalapplications

v Support of enterprise customers requiring unified access to Network AttachedStorage (NAS) via Fibre Channel (FC) or Internet Small Computer SystemInterface (iSCSI)

v Attachment of Fibre Channel (FC), Serial Attached SCSI (SAS), and SerialAdvanced Technology Attachment (SATA) disk expansion units designed to allowdeployment in multiple environments, including data retention, NearStore,disk-to-disk backup scenarios, and high-performance, mission-critical I/Ointensive operations

All these models support the EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit, the EXN2000and EXN4000 FC storage expansion units, and the EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansionunit. At least one storage expansion unit must be attached to the N series system.

Table 45. N6240 physical attributes

Attribute C21 E11 E21

Number of controllers 2 1 2

Rack space required 3U 3U 6U

Quad core 2.3 GHz CPU 2 1 2

Random access memory (GB) 16 8 16

4-Gb Fibre Channel ports 4 2 4

6-Gb SAS ports 4 2 4

Disk drives supported 600 600 600

1-Gb Ethernet ports 4 2 4

PCIe expansion slots 4 6 12

Serial console ports 2 1 2

LAN management (RLM) ports 2 1 2

Redundant power supplies and cooling fans Yes Yes Yes

Optional HBA features can be used to increase the maximums as follows. Note thateach platform is limited by the maximum number of adapters that can be installed.


FC loops 8 13 26

FC loops (dual-path) 4 n/a 13

SAS stacks n/a 13 12

SAS stacks (dual-path) 4 n/a 13

10-Gb Ethernet ports 8 8 16

10-Gb FCoE ports 8 8 16

EXN1000 storage expansion units 42 42 42






Connecting storage expansion units to the N6240The N6240 storage controller may be ordered without an accompanying expansionunit, but it requires at least one storage expansion unit to be operational. TheEXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000, or EXN4000 satisfy this requirement.

The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosurecontaining five, and up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology attachment(SATA) disk drives, either in 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB, or 2 TB physical capacities.

The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U rack-mountabledisk enclosure containing five, and up to a maximum of 14, FC disk drives. Theysupport FC disk drives of 300 GB physical capacity (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm),450 GB physical capacity (15,000 rpm), and 600 GB physical capacity (15,000rpm).




Within a single N series storage expansion unit, all disk drives must be of aparticular type (rotational speed/capacity). For the initial order of the IBM SystemStorage N series, orders for EXNx000 expansion units may not include more thantwo types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N6200 series systems is determined bythe number of disk drives supported. The N6240 models each support 600 harddrive spindles.

The following table describes the maximum supported total physical storagecapacity for the N6240:



Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives







42 294 588 TB


42 588 1176 TB





Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives








25 300 600 TB


25 600 1200 TB


42 588 176.4 TB


42 588 264.6 TB


42 588 352.8 TB

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop withEXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. A maximum of sixstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on asingle Fibre Channel loop.



N6240 feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N6240 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N6240, see Appendix H, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N6200 series systems,” on page 221.



Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2858 C21, E11, E21 1044


2858 C21, E11, E21 1051




5m FCoE SFP+ copper cable1 2858 C21, E11, E21 1055

NIC SFP+ 2858 C21, E11, E21 2012

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP+ 2858 C21, E11, E21 20131 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.


N7700 filer hardware featuresThe N7700 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 andassociated software with gateway options.


See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices foryour N7000 series filer system.




N7700 A11The N7700 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller withiSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7700is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. TheN7700 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The basechassis includes:

v Two AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2cache



v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports

v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans

v Three PCI-X expansion slots



v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. OnePCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)


For the N7700 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adaptersis eight (three PCI-X and five PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for thestandard (included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter card.

Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storagesystems are described in Appendix I, “Optional adapter cards supported byN7000 series systems,” on page 229.

The N7700 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A andloop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition offour optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 840 total disk drives. TheModel A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 Gigabit Ethernet ports via theaddition of two optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards(NICs) (feature number 1009).


N7700 A21The N7700 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7700 ModelA11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) licensed function. The N7700 Model A21 supports a maximum of 840 drives(or LUNs, with the gateway option), 32 GB of DDR-333 memory, and ten backendFibre Channel loops. The Model A21 consists of two nodes that are designed toprovide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. For theModel A21, each node is a 6U rack-mountable storage controller. Therefore, theModel A21 occupies a total of 12U of rack space.

The Model A21 includes:

v Four AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2cache


v 1 GB of NVRAM

v 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports


v Six PCI-X expansion slots

v 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are available for customer use. TwoPCIe slots are reserved for NVRAM6 adapters.)


For the N7700 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adaptersis 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard(included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter cards.



The N7700 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A andloop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of twooptional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014, 1029, or1035).

The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports via theaddition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number1009).




The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7700 system is determined only by thenumber of disk drives supported.




Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives








84 420 840 TB


84 840 1680 TB









Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives




84 420 840 TB


84 840 1680 TB


84 840 60.48 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


84 840 120.96 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


84 840 252 TB


84 840 378 TB


84 840 504 TB





Connecting an N7700 gateway to external storageYou must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a FibreChannel SAN.






N7700 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N7700 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N7700, see Appendix I, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” on page 229.



2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A20, A21 1037

5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A20, A21 1040


Copper-fiber converter 2866 A20, A21 1042

Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1044

30m 50-micron MMF cable(LC/SC)1

2866 A20, A21 1047

4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2866 A20, A21 1050


2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1051

1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable3 2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1053


1054


1055


2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1071


2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1072


2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

1073

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP 2 2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

2012

1 For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.2 FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter).3 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.



Plant install in 2101 rack 2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

9201

Field install rack mount kit 2866 A10, A11, A20,A21

9202



N7900 filer hardware featuresThe N7900 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 andassociated software with gateway options.


See the Interoperability Matrix at the following web site for supported devices foryour N7000 series filer system.




N7900 A11The N7900 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller withiSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7900Model A11 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inchrack. The N7900 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis.The base chassis includes:

v Four AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB oflevel 2 cache



v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports


v Three PCI-X expansion slots

v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. OnePCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)


For the N7900 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adaptersis eight (three PCI-X and five PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for thestandard (included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter card.




The N7900 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 multi-path (loop A andloop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition offour optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 1176 total disk drives (orLUNs, with the gateway option). The Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of14 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the addition of two optional quad-port copper GigabitEthernet Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1009).


N7900 A21The N7900 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7900 ModelA11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover(CFO) licensed function. The N7900 Model A21 also supports a maximum of 1176drives (or LUNs, with the gateway option) and 14 backend Fibre Channel loops.

The Model A21 consists of two nodes that are designed to provide failover andfailback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model A21, each nodeis a 6U rack-mountable storage controller. Therefore, the Model A21 occupies atotal of 12U of rack space.


v Eight AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB oflevel 2 cache



v 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports

v 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports


v Six PCI-X expansion slots

v 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are available for customer use. TwoPCIe slots are reserved for NVRAM6 adapters.)


For the N7900 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adaptersis 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard(included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter cards.


The N7900 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A andloop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition offour optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,1029, or 1035). The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 GigabitEthernet ports via the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit EthernetNICs (feature number 1009).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A21 (withrespect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables


are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables (featurenumbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.



The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7900 system is determined only by thenumber of disk drives supported.




Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives





EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk drives1 84 1176 1176 TB



84 588 1176 TB


84 1176 2352 TB








84 588 1176 TB


84 1176 2352 TB


84 1176 82.67 TB

EXN4000andEXN2000


84 1176 169.34 TB




Maximumstorage

enclosuresMaximum

disk drives


EXN4000andEXN2000


84 1176 352.80 TB


84 1176 529.20 TB


84 1176 705.6 TB

1 The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7900 is determined by the maximum numberof disk drives supported (1176) and a maximum physical storage limit of 1176 TB insystems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or 2352 TB in systems running Data ONTAP 8.0.x. Bothlimits must be honored.




Connecting an N7900 gateway to external storageYou must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a FibreChannel SAN.




N7900 filer feature codesThe following table lists the feature codes for N7900 cables and connectors. For alist of the HBA feature codes supported for the N7900, see Appendix I, “Optionaladapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” on page 229.



2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A20, A21 1037



Table 52. N7900 filer feature codes (continued)




Copper-Fiber Converter 2867 A20, A21 1042

Fibre Channel wrap plug, LC 2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1044

30m 50-micron MMF cable(LC/SC)1

2867 A20, A21 1047

4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2867 A20, A21 1050


2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1051

1m FCoE SFP+ copper cable 2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1053


1054


1055


2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1071


2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1072


2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

1073

10-Gbps Ethernet SFP 2 2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

2012

1 For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.2 FC 2012 is for use only with FC 1065 (Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter).3 For use with FCoE adapters whenever copper cables are required.



Plant install in 2101 rack 2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

9201

Field install rack mount kit 2867 A10, A11, A20,A21

9202


EXN1000 storage expansion unit hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit is a SATA diskstorage device for IBM System Storage N series systems. The EXN1000 3U diskstorage expansion unit may be mounted in any industry-standard 19-inch rack.

The EXN1000 contains:

v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans


v Dual redundant disk storage expansion unit switched controllers

v Fourteen hard disk drive bays.

The EXN1000 SATA storage expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of five SATAdisk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same capacity), in 250GB, 320 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, 1 TB or 2 TB physical capacities.

v With 250 GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 3.5TB of physical storage capacity.


v With 500 GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 7TB of physical storage capacity.


v With 1 TB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 14 TBof physical storage capacity.

v With 2 TB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 28 TBof physical storage capacity.

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least five of the drives mustbe installed in the EXN1000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099)covering the remaining drive bays.

Attention: 320 GB SATA hard disk drives are not supported for use in EXN1000swhen used in N7700 and N7900 filer configurations.

EXN1000 feature codesTable 54 lists the feature codes for the EXN1000.

Table 54. EXN1000 feature codes


SFP GBIC 2861 001 2010

Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable0.5 m 1

2861 001 2020

Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m 2861 001 2021

Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable3.0 m 1

2861 001 2022

1.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2861 001 2042



250 GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4010

320 GB SATA Drive 2 2861 001 4011

500 GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4012

750 GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4013

1 TB SATA Drive 2861 001 4016

2 TB SATA Drive 2861 001 4021

HDD Blank Panel 2861 001 4099


Table 54. EXN1000 feature codes (continued)

Description Machine Model Feature1 Fibre Channel Copper NAS to EXP patch cables are supported only for direct connectionsto storage expansion units from N3700 storage systems with early CPU module designs.For more information, see “Understanding the differences between early and current N3700CPU modules” on page 21.2 320 GB SATA hard disk drives are not supported for use in EXN1000s when used inN7700 and N7900 filer configurations.

The power cord features for the EXN1000 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord listfor N series storage systems,” on page 171.

EXN2000 storage expansion unit hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage EXN2000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is a FibreChannel disk storage device for IBM System Storage N series systems. Physicalcapacity can be scaled up to 4.2 TB for each EXN2000 added to an N seriessystem (assuming the EXN2000 is populated with 14 300 GB HDDs).




v Fourteen hard disk drive bays

The EXN2000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is shipped with a minimum offour Fibre Channel disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the samecapacity). Disk drive options for the EXN2000 include 72 GB (10,000 or 15,000RPM), 144 GB (10,000 or 15,000 RPM), and 300 GB (10,000 RPM).

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least four of the drives mustbe installed in the EXN2000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099)covering the remaining drive bays.




SFP GBIC 2863 001 2010

Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable0.5 m

2863 001 20201


Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable3.0 m

2863 001 20221





2863 001 4000


Table 55. EXN2000 feature codes (continued)



2863 001 4001


2863 001 4002


2863 001 4003


2863 001 4004

HDD Blank Panel 2863 001 40991 Fibre Channel Copper NAS to EXP patch cables are supported only for direct connectionsto storage expansion units from N3700 storage systems with early CPU module designs.For more information, see “Understanding the differences between early and current N3700CPU modules” on page 21.


EXN3000 storage expansion unit hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage EXN3000 SAS/SATA expansion unit provides low-costhigh-capacity Serially Attached SCSI (SAS) or Serial Advanced TechnologyAttachment (SATA) disk storage for supported IBM N series system storagesystems. For connectivity to the EXN3000 expansion disks, an available PCI-e I/Oslot in the N series controller is needed for the SAS HBA.

Note: The EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion unit is available for attachmentto all N series systems except the N3300, N3700, N5200, and N5500systems.

The EXN3000 SAS/SATA storage expansion unit is a 4U disk storage expansionunit. The EXN3000 contains:

v Redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans

Note: Depending on the disk drive type, your EXN3000 might have two or fourpower supplies. EXN3000s with SAS disk drives have four power suppliesand require the use of four power outlets. EXN3000s with SATA diskdrives have two power supplies and require the use of two power outlets.


v 24 hard disk drive slots

v Diagnostic and status LEDs

The 4U disk expansion design of the EXN3000 houses up to 24 SAS or SATA diskdrives. Disk drive options for the EXN3000 include 300 GB, 450 GB, and 600 GBSAS drives (15,000 RPM) and 500 GB, 1 TB and 2 TB SATA drives (7200 RPM).

SAS and SATA drives cannot be intermixed; the EXN3000 is either a SAS storagecontroller or a SATA storage controller. The drives must be ordered as features ofthe EXN3000.


For detailed information about the important differences between EXN3000 andEXN1000/2000/4000 storage expansion units, see the IBM System StorageEXN3000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service Guide.




SAS disk power supply 2857 003 1102

2.0 m Mini SAS-QSFP Cable 2857 003 2050

5.0 m Mini SAS-QSFP Cable 2857 003 2051

0.5 m SAS QSFP-QSFP Cable 2857 003 2052



0.5 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 2857 003 2063

2.0 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 2857 003 2064

5.0 m SAS RJ-45 ACP Cable 2857 003 2065

300 GB SAS Drive 2857 003 4015

450 GB SAS Drive 2857 003 4016

600 GB SAS Drive 2857 003 4017

500 GB SATA Drive 2857 003 4018

1 TB SATA Drive 2857 003 4020

2 TB SATA Drive 2857 003 4021


EXN4000 storage expansion unit hardware featuresThe IBM System Storage EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is a FibreChannel disk storage device for the IBM System Storage N series systems.Physical capacity can be scaled up to 8.4 TB for each EXN4000 added to an Nseries system (assuming the EXN4000 is populated with fourteen 600 GB HDDs).

The EXN4000 is designed to provide 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, and 4-Gbps Fibre Channeldisk expansion for the IBM System Storage N series storage controllers. EXN4000sattached to a 2-Gbps loop must be manually configured for 2-Gbps speed.

Note: The EXN4000 4-Gbps support requires that the N series system be runningData ONTAP 7.2.1 or later.




v Fourteen hard disk drive bays

The EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion unit is shipped with a minimum offour Fibre Channel disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same


capacity). Disk drive options for the EXN4000 include 144 GB (15,000 RPM), 300GB (10,000 RPM or 15,000 RPM), 450 GB (15,000 RPM), and 600 GB (15,000RPM).

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least four of the drives mustbe installed in the EXN4000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099)covering the remaining drive bays.




4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2863 004 2011






2863 004 4003


2863 004 4004


2863 004 4006


2863 004 4007


2863 004 4017

HDD Blank Panel 2863 004 4099


Rack mount requirementsN series storage systems and storage expansion units should be rack-mounted. Nseries storage systems and storage expansion units include a mounting rail kit. Therecommended racks are:

v IBM 7014 Model T00, which is a 36U high rack

v IBM 7014 Model T42, which is a 42U high rack

v IBM 2101 Model N00 rack, which is a 36U high rack

v IBM 2101 Model N42 rack, which is a 42U high rack

Other racks may be used, provided they allow the clearances specified inAppendix C, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 175. N seriesstorage systems and storage expansion units do not mount in all IBM racks. It isimportant to check clearances when using any rack other than the IBM 7014 or IBM2101.


Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features

The operating system for the IBM NAS N series products is the Data ONTAPsoftware. It is a highly optimized, scalable and flexible operating system that canhandle heterogeneous environments. It integrates into UNIX, Windows, and webenvironments.

Data ONTAP characteristics include:

v Flexible volumes that do not require prepartitioning

v Usage of multiple processors for performance

v Block-level data access over a Fibre Channel SAN fabric using FCP and over anIP-based Ethernet network using iSCSI

v File-level data access over an IP-based Ethernet network using file accessprotocols such as NFS, CIFS, HTTP, or FTP

v Data protection and recovery

v Disk-based data permanence features for regulated and reference data

v Double parity RAID

v Setup wizard

v FilerView™, a web-based administration tool that allows IT administrators to fullymanage N series systems from remote locations. FilerView is a simple andintuitive web-based single-appliance administration.

v SnapShot™, which enables instant self-service file backup and recovery for endusers. Only block level changes are stored, so only a minimal amount of space isrequired for each subsequent snapshot.

v FlexVol™, which allows an administrator to create multiple flexible volumes acrossa large pool of disks. This feature enables dynamic, non-disruptive storage (thin)provisioning and increases space- and time-efficiency. FlexVol enables moreproductive use of available storage and helps improve performance.

The following protocols are supported for IBM N series storage systems.

CIFS CIFS allows Microsoft Windows servers and clients access over the IPnetwork using CIFS file system protocols. Microsoft Windows client accesslicenses (CALs) are not required.

CIFS supports an active directory environment.

To enable CIFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code.See “IBM N series host software features” on page 106.

NFS NFS allows UNIX and Linux servers and clients access over an IP networkusing NFS file system protocols.

To enable NFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code.See “IBM N series host software features” on page 106.

iSCSI iSCSI allows transfer of data between storage and servers in block I/Oformats (iSCSI protocol) across an IP network. iSCSI enables the creationof IP SANs for optimizing the transfer of database traffic in IP environments.

To enable iSCSI, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See“IBM N series host software features” on page 106.

FCP FCP allows transfer of data between storage and servers in block I/O


formats utilizing FCP protocols across a Fibre Channel SAN. FCP enablesparticipation of an N series storage solution within Fibre Channel SANenvironments.

To enable FCP, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See “IBMN series host software features” on page 106.

Following are descriptions of some of the Data ONTAP software packages availablefor N series storage systems as feature codes.

Advanced Single Instance StorageThis feature provides block-level deduplication within the entire flexiblevolume on an IBM N series storage controller that has the near-lineFunction feature enabled. Advanced Single Instance Storage only storesunique data blocks in the flexible volume and creates a small amount ofadditional metadata in the process. Each block of data has a digital"signature," that is compared to all other signatures in the flexible volume. Ifan exact byte-for-byte block match exists on the flexible volume, theduplicate block is discarded and its disk space is reclaimed.

CFO Installed on a pair of N series storage controllers, this feature is designed toenable the transfer of data service from an unavailable controller to theother controller in the cluster. It is designed to deliver a robust and highlyavailable data service for business-critical environments.

Disk SanitizationDisk sanitization is the process of physically obliterating data by overwritingdisks with specified byte patterns or random data in a manner that helpsprevent recovery of current data by any known recovery methods. Thisfeature enables you to carry out disk sanitization by using three successivebyte-overwrite patterns per cycle and a default six cycles per operation.

Note: After the disk sanitization feature has been installed on an N seriesstorage system, it cannot be uninstalled.

FlexCache™ for NFSFlexCache for NFS is designed to create a caching layer in your storageinfrastructure that helps to eliminate performance bottlenecks in NFSenvironments. It is designed to replicate hot data sets to local cachingvolumes anywhere in the infrastructure. This is useful with NFSimplementations in compute-intensive applications, distributed computingenvironments, and reverse-tiered storage.

FlexClone™

FlexClone enables near-instant replication of data volumes/sets withoutrequiring additional storage space at the time of creation. FlexClone allowsan IT administrator to make a backup copy of a database and then modifyand run testing against the test (backup) database without affecting theonline database and without taking the online database offline.

iSCSI ProtocolThis feature enables the iSCSI Protocol licensed function, which isdesigned to provide connectivity to clients that transfer data via the iSCSIprotocol.

MetroClusterThis feature is an integrated, high-availability, and business-continuancesolution designed to leverage proven technologies from IBM. It expands thecapabilities of the IBM N series portfolio of high-availability and disasterrecovery solutions–a portfolio that includes failover, data replication, and


backup solutions. MetroCluster is designed to be a simple-to-administersolution that extends failover capability from within a data center to aremote site. It also provides replication of data at the primary site to aremote site, helping to keep data at the remote site current. Thecombination of failover and data replication aids in the recovery fromdisaster, helping prevent loss of data in less time than otherwise possible.

Microsoft Exchange BundleThis Microsoft Exchange Bundle feature is designed to provide support fora specified number of Single Mailbox Recovery users.

MultiStore®

MultiStore permits consolidating a large number of Windows and UNIX fileservers onto a single storage system.

MultiStore is designed to let you quickly and easily create separate, privatelogical partitions in filer network and storage resources. Each virtual storagepartition is designed to maintain separation from every other storagepartition to prevent different enterprise departments that share the samestorage resources from accessing or finding other partitions. MultiStorehelps prevent information on any virtual partition from being viewed, used,or downloaded by an unauthorized users.

NearStoreThis feature is designed to help optimize an N series system for dataprotection and retention applications. It enables additional concurrentstreams and SnapVault for NetBackup.

SnapLock ComplianceSnapLock Compliance provides data permanence storage that enablescompliance with government records retention regulations by usingSEC-compliant disk-based WORM technology.

SnapLock EnterpriseLike SnapLock Compliance, SnapLock Enterprise provides datapermanence storage that enables compliance with government recordsretention regulations by using SEC-compliant disk-based WORMtechnology. SnapLock Enterprise allows administrators to delete SnapLockEnterprise volumes.

SnapManager™ for ExchangeSnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storagemanagement while simplifying configuration, backup, and restore operationsfor Microsoft Exchange databases.

SnapManager for Hyper-VSnapManager for Hyper-V is designed to designed to integrate with theMicrosoft Hyper-V virtual server infrastructure and automate crucial taskssuch as back up, restore, recovery, and cloning. It allows connectivity of anynumber of Microsoft Hyper-V servers to one storage controller.

SnapManager for OracleSnapManager for Oracle is designed to integrate with an Oracle Databaseand automate crucial tasks such as back up, restore, database recovery,and cloning.

SnapManager for SAPSnapManager for SAP is designed to allow SAP administrators to backupand restore a SAP system hosted on an Oracle database. It is integratedwith the interface for SAP br* tools for backup and recovery of SAP

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 91

systems as well as with the N series data management tools. It is designedto simplify provisioning and data protection on enterprise SAP systems.

SnapManager for SharePointIBM SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint provides a single consoleto manage disk-based backup and recovery of SharePoint contentdatabases, portals, sites, sub-sites, folders, documents, and versions ofdocuments. Deployed in combination with an N series storage system,SnapManager software is designed to provide near-instantaneous hotbackups and rapid restores to help you achieve a combination ofavailability, scalability, performance, and reliability for SharePointenvironments. This feature allows connectivity of any number of MicrosoftOffice SharePoint servers to one N series storage system.

SnapManager for SQLSnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore timesof SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies.SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databasesusing minimal disk space for each additional full backup.

SnapManager for VISnapManager for Virtual Infrastructures (SnapManager VI) is designed tointegrate with a virtual server infrastructure and automate crucial tasks suchas back up, restore, recovery, and cloning. It allows connectivity of anynumber of VMWare servers to one storage controller.

SnapMirror®

SnapMirror provides remote mirroring software that enables automated filesystem replication between sites. SnapMirror enables asynchronous,synchronous, and semi-synchronous remote replication over inexpensiveInternet protocols. Full backup is followed by incremental block updates.

SnapMirror/SnapVault BundleThis feature is a bundle of the SnapMirror and SnapVault Secondaryfeatures, designed to provide improved value for the combination. It istypically used by customers wanting to provide a mirrored, remote site fortheir data backup. This feature accomplishes that by having the SnapVaultfunction create an initial, local backup copy of the data, and then having theSnapMirror function copy the data to a remote site. SnapVault Primary andSnapManager are not included in this bundle.

SnapMover®

SnapMover provides a local data migration solution for optimizing workloadsacross N series systems sharing a common disk array. SnapMover allowsyou to migrate the ownership of a volume from one filer to another filer witha single command. This feature also allows for better resource utilizationand performance amongst multiple N series systems.

Note: MultiStore and Clustering are prerequisites for SnapMover.

SnapRestore®

SnapRestore enables quick restoration of snapshot data files and volumes.It provides instant self-service volume recovery for large individual files.SnapRestore allows volumes to be restored with a single command (asopposed to the file level restorations that SnapShot offers).

SnapValidator™

SnapValidator provides data validation and protection for Oracle data.


SnapVault PrimarySnapVault Primary provides disk-based backup by periodically backing up aSnapShot copy to another system. SnapVault provides heterogeneous,super-efficient, hourly disk-based online backup and restoration byperiodically backing up a snapshot copy to another system. SnapVaultPrimary is the license for the primary backup system in use.

SnapVault SecondaryLike SnapVault Primary, SnapVault Secondary provides disk-based backupby periodically backing up a SnapShot copy to another system. SnapVaultSecondary is required to attain the license for the secondary backup device.

SyncMirror®

SyncMirror provides data protection by maintaining two copies of dataonline; SyncMirror maintains strict physical separation between the twocopies. This feature enables synchronous local mirroring from one volumeto another volume attached to the same filer. SyncMirror includes volumemirroring between two clustered nodes.

Software packsSoftware packs are designed to provide simplified ordering of commoncombinations of software features.

The following software pack is available for N6040, N6060 and N6070 systems.

Base packThis software pack provides the basic software functions for N seriessystems. It includes iSCSI, FCP, HTTP, SyncMirror, NearStore,Deduplication, and one license for Operations Manager.

The following software packs are available for N3300, N3400, or N3600 systems.

Base packThis software pack provides the basic software functions for N seriessystems. It includes iSCSI, FCP, HTTP, SyncMirror, NearStore,Deduplication, and one license for Operations Manager.

Foundation packThis software pack provides the foundation for expanded use of the Nseries system. It includes SnapRestore, SnapVault Primary, and one nodeof Provisioning Manager.

Protection packThis software pack provides the expanded protection software capabilitiesof the N series system. It includes SnapMirror, SnapVault Secondary, andone node of Protection Manager.

Advanced packThis software pack provides the basis for the advanced functions of the Nseries system. It includes FlexClone, MultiStore, SnapLock Compliance,and SnapLock Enterprise.

Application pack (for N3400 only)This software pack provides the basis for the application functions of the Nseries system. It includes SnapManager for Exchange - Filer, SnapManagerfor Oracle - Filer, SnapManager for SQL - Filer, SnapManager forSharePoint-Filer, SnapManager for SAP - Filer, SnapManager for VI - Filer,SnapDrive for UNIX - Filer, SnapDrive for Windows - Filer, SMBR Windows(1500pk for single-node systems, 3000pk for dual-node systems), and


ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO (enables 25 Windows systems forsingle-node systems, 50 for dual-node systems).

Server pack (for N3400 only)This software pack provides the basis for the server functions of the Nseries system. It includes SnapManager for VI - Filer, SnapDrive for UNIX -Filer, SnapDrive for Windows - Filer, and ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO.

Software bundlesSoftware bundles are designed to provide simplified ordering of commoncombinations of software features.

The following software feature code bundles are available for N3300, N3400, orN3600 systems.

v Windows bundle (N3300, N3400, N3600)

This software bundle provides the foundation for expanded use of the N seriessystem in a Windows environment. It includes:

– Storage system-based

- CIFS

- SnapRestore

- SnapVault Primary

- SnapVault Secondary

- SnapMirror

– Host server-based

- SnapManager for Exchange - Filer

- SnapManager for SQL - Filer

- SnapManager for SAP - Filer

- SnapManager for Oracle - Filer

- SnapManager for Hyper-V - Filer

- SnapManager for VI - Filer

- SnapManager for SharePoint-Filer

- SnapDrive for UNIX - Filer

- SnapDrive for Windows - Filer

- one license per node of Protection Manager

- Provisioning Manager Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO

- SMBR Windows

v Virtualization bundle (N3300, N3400, N3600)

This software bundle provides the expanded virtualization software capabilities ofthe N series system. It includes:


- NFS

- SnapRestore

- SnapVault Primary


- SnapMirror











- one Provisioning Manager tier x

- one Protection Manager tier x licence

- Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO (the number of Windows systemsvaries by model)

v Complete bundle (N3300, N3400, N3600) This software bundle provides thebasis for the advanced functions of the N series system. It includes:


- NFS

- CIFS

- SnapVault Primary


- SnapMirror

- FlexClone

- MultiStore

- SnapLock Compliance

- SnapLock Enterprise








- SnapManager for SharePoint - Filer




- Provisioning Manager

- Data ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO

- SMBR Windows

The following software feature code bundles are available for N6040 systems.

v Windows bundle (N6040)

This software bundle provides the foundation for expanded use of the N seriessystem in a Windows environment. It includes:


- CIFS

- SnapRestore

- SnapVault Primary



- SnapMirror














- SMBR Windows

v Virtualization bundle (N6040)

This software bundle provides the expanded virtualization software capabilities ofthe N series system. It includes:


- NFS

- SnapRestore

- SnapVault Primary


- SnapMirror






- one license per node of Provisioning Manager


v Complete bundle (N6040)

This software bundle provides the basis for the advanced functions of the Nseries system. It includes:


- NFS

- CIFS

- SnapVault Primary


- SnapMirror

- FlexClone

- MultiStore

- SnapLock Compliance

- SnapLock Enterprise















- SMBR Windows

The following software feature code bundles are available for N6210 and N6240systems.

v Complete bundle (N6210 and N6240)

This software bundle provides the basis for the advanced functions of the Nseries system. It includes:


- NFS

- CIFS

- FCP

- iSCSI

- SnapVault

- SnapRestore

- SnapMirror

- FlexClone












IBM N series controller software feature codesTable 58, Table 59 on page 99, Table 60 on page 101, Table 61 on page 103,Table 62 on page 104, and Table 63 on page 105 list the supported softwarefeatures for all N series models.

Table 58. N series software licensed function indicators for N6210 and N6240 (Model 2858)

DescriptionN6210 2858

C10N6210 2858

C20N6240 2858

C21N6240 2858

E11N6240 2858

E21

Data ONTAP Essentials 5750 5700 5600 5650 5600

Data ONTAP Essentials - GW 5775 5725 5625 5675 5625

CIFS initial 5751 5701 5601 5651 5601

CIFS initial - GW 5776 5726 5626 5676 5626

CIFS secondary 5752 5702 5602 5652 5602

CIFS secondary - GW 5777 5727 5627 5677 5627

FCP initial 5753 5703 5603 5653 5603

FCP initial - GW 5778 5728 5628 5678 5628

FCP secondary 5754 5704 5604 5654 5604

FCP secondary - GW 5779 5729 5629 5679 5629

iSCSI initial 5755 5705 5605 5655 5605

iSCSI initial - GW 5780 5730 5630 5680 5630

iSCSI secondary 5756 5706 5606 5656 5606

iSCSI secondary - GW 5781 5731 5631 5681 5631

NFS initial 5757 5707 5607 5657 5607

NFS initial - GW 5782 5732 5632 5682 5632

NFS secondary 5758 5708 5608 5658 5608

NFS secondary - GW 5783 5733 5633 5683 5633

SnapLock Compliance 5759 5709 5609 5659 5609

SnapLock Compliance - GW 5784 5734 5634 5684 5634

SnapLock Enterprise 5769 5719 5619 5669 5619

SnapLock Enterprise - GW 5794 5744 5644 5694 5644

Data ONTAP 5760 5710 5610 5660 5610

Data ONTAP - GW 5785 5735 5635 5685 5635

SnapRestore 5761 5711 5611 5661 5611

SnapRestore - GW 5786 5736 5636 5686 5636

SnapMirror 5762 5712 5612 5662 5612

SnapMirror - GW 5787 5737 5637 5687 5637

SnapVault 5763 5713 5613 5663 5613

SnapVault - GW 5788 5738 5638 5688 5638

FlexClone 5764 5714 5614 5664 5614

FlexClone - GW 5789 5739 5639 5689 5639

SnapManager Suite 5765 5715 5615 5665 5615

SnapManager Suite - GW 5790 5740 5640 5690 5640

Complete Bundle 5766 5716 5616 5666 5616


Table 58. N series software licensed function indicators for N6210 and N6240 (Model 2858) (continued)

DescriptionN6210 2858

C10N6210 2858

C20N6240 2858

C21N6240 2858

E11N6240 2858

E21

Complete Bundle - GW 5791 5741 5641 5691 5641

MetroCluster N/A 5717 N/A N/A 5617

MetroCluster - GW N/A 5742 N/A N/A 5642

Performance Acceleration Module II 5768 5718 5618 5668 5618

Performance Acceleration Module II -GW

5793 5743 5643 5693 5643

Table 59. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858)

Description 2858 A10 2858 A20 2858 A11 2858 A21 2858 A12 2858 A22

Base Pack 5301 5351 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Windows Bundle 5302 5352 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Virtualization Bundle 5303 5353 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Complete Bundle 5304 5354 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Data ONTAP 6800 6850 6101 6201 6500 6550

Data ONTAP - GW 6900 6950 6301 6401 6600 6650

Data ONTAP 6800 6850 6101 6201 6500 6550

Data ONTAP - GW 6900 6950 6301 6401 6600 6650

CIFS 6801 7451 7401 6051 6501 6551

CIFS - GW 6901 7551 7501 6151 6601 6651

HTTP 6802 7452 7402 6052 6502 6552

HTTP - GW 6902 7552 7502 6152 6602 6652

NFS 6803 7453 7403 6053 6503 6553

NFS - GW 6903 7553 7503 6153 6603 6653

CFO n/a 7454 n/a 6054 n/a 6554

CFO - GW n/a 7554 n/a 6154 n/a 6654

CFO for MetroCluster 6804 n/a 7421 n/a 6504 n/a

CFO for MetroCluster - GW 6904 n/a 7521 n/a 6604 n/a

FlexClone 6805 7455 7404 6055 6505 6555

FlexClone - GW 6905 7555 7504 6155 6605 6655

MultiStore 6806 7456 7405 6056 6506 6556

MultiStore - GW 6906 7556 7505 6156 6606 6656

SnapMirror 6807 7457 7406 6057 6507 6557

SnapMirror - GW 6907 7557 7506 6157 6607 6657

SnapLock Compliance 6808 7458 7407 6058 6508 6558

SnapLock Compliance - GW 6908 7558 7520 6158 6608 6658

SnapLock Enterprise 6809 7459 7408 6059 6509 6559

SnapLock Enterprise - GW 6909 7559 7507 6159 6609 6659

SnapMover n/a 7460 n/a 6060 n/a 6560

SnapMover - GW 6910 7560 7508 6160 n/a 6660

SnapRestore 6811 7461 7409 6061 6511 6561


Table 59. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) (continued)


SnapRestore - GW 6911 7561 7509 6161 6611 6661

SnapVault Primary 6812 7462 7410 6062 6512 6562

SnapVault Primary - GW 6912 7562 7510 6162 6612 6662

SnapVault Secondary 6813 7463 7411 6063 6513 6563

SnapVault Secondary - GW 6913 7563 7511 6163 6613 6663

SyncMirror 6816 7466 7414 6066 6516 6566

SyncMirror - GW 6916 7566 7514 6166 6616 6666

FlexScale 6817 7467 7415 6076 6517 6567

FlexScale - GW 6917 7567 7515 6176 6617 6667

SnapValidator 6818 7468 7416 6067 6518 6568

SnapValidator - GW 6918 7568 7516 6167 6618 6668

Fibre Channel Protocol 6819 7469 7417 6068 6519 6569

Fibre Channel Protocol - GW 6919 7569 7517 6168 6619 6669

Disk Sanitization 6820 7470 7418 6069 6520 6570

Disk Sanitization - GW 6920 7580 7530 6169 6620 6670

SnapManager for Exchange 6821 7471 7419 6070 6521 6571

SnapManager for Exchange -GW

6921 7570 7518 6170 6621 6671

SnapManager for SQL 6822 7472 7420 6071 6522 6572

SnapManager for SQL - GW 6922 7571 7519 6171 6622 6672

MetroCluster 6823 7473 7431 6073 6524 6576

MetroCluster - GW 6923 7573 7523 6173 6624 6674

SAN Bundle n/a 7474 n/a 6074 n/a 6574

iSCSI Protocol 6825 7475 7425 6075 6525 6575

iSCSI Protocol - GW 6925 7575 7525 6175 6625 6675

MS Exchange Bundle (5000users)

n/a n/a n/a 6078 n/a n/a

SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle 6829 7479 7429 6079 6529 6579

SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle -GW

6929 7579 7529 6179 6629 6679

NearStore 6831 7481 7430 6072 6523 6573

NearStore - GW 6931 7572 7522 6172 6623 6673

Advanced Single InstanceStorage

6832 7482 7432 6082 6532 6582

Advanced Single InstanceStorage - GW

6932 7574 7524 6182 6632 6682

Performance AcceleratorModule II

6833 7483 7422 6077 6533 6583

Performance AcceleratorModule II - GW

6933 7583 7526 6177 6633 6683

SnapManager for SAP 6838 7488 7438 6088 6538 6588

SnapManager for SAP - GW 6938 7588 7538 6188 6638 6688


Table 59. N series software licensed function indicators for N6040, N6060, and N6070 (Model 2858) (continued)


SnapManager for Oracle 6839 7489 7439 6089 6539 6859

SnapManager for Oracle - GW 6939 7589 7539 6189 6639 6689

SnapManager for Hyper-V -Filer

6841 7491 7441 6091 6541 6591

SnapManager for Hyper-V - GW 6941 7591 7541 6191 6641 6691

FlexCache for NFS 6847 7497 7447 6080 6547 6597

FlexCache for NFS - GW 6947 7597 7547 6180 6647 6697

SnapManager for VI 6848 7498 7448 6098 6548 6598

SnapManager for VI - GW 6948 7598 7548 6198 6648 6698

SnapManager for SharePoint 6849 7499 7449 6099 6549 6599

SnapManager for SharePoint -GW

6949 7599 7549 6199 6649 6699

Table 60. N series software licensed function indicators for N3300, N3400, N3600, and N3700 (Models 2859 to 2863)

Description 2859 A10 2859 A20 2859 A11 2859 A21 2862 A102862A20

2863A10

2863A20

Base Pack 5001 5051 5201 5251 5101 5151 n/a n/a

Foundation Pack 5002 5052 5202 5252 5102 5152 n/a n/a

Protection Pack 5003 5053 5203 5253 5103 5153 n/a n/a

Advanced Pack 5004 5054 5204 5254 5104 5154 n/a n/a

Windows Bundle 5020 5070 5220 5270 n/a 5170 n/a n/a

Virtualization Bundle 5021 5071 5221 5271 n/a 5171 n/a n/a

Complete Bundle 5022 5072 5222 5272 n/a 5172 n/a n/a

Application Pack n/a n/a 5223 5273 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Server Pack n/a n/a 5224 5274 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Data ONTAP 6300 6350 6700 6750 7001 7101 7000 7100

CIFS 6302 6352 6002 6102 7002 7102 7002 7102

HTTP 6303 6353 7003 7103 7003 7103 7003 7103

NFS 6304 6354 6004 6104 7004 7104 7004 7104

CFO n/a 6355 n/a 6105 n/a 7105 n/a 7105

SyncMirror 6306 6356 7006 7106 7006 7106 n/a n/a

SnapManager forHyper-V

6307 6357 7050 7150 7050 7150 7050 7150

FlexClone 6311 6361 7011 7111 7011 7111 7011 7111

MultiStore 6320 6370 7020 7120 7020 7120 7020 7120

NearStore 6322 6372 7022 7122 7022 7122 n/a n/a

iSCSI Protocol 6325 6375 7025 7125 7025 7125 7025 7125

SnapMirror/SnapVaultBundle

6329 6379 7029 7129 7029 7129 7029 7129

FlexCache for NFS 6330 6380 7030 7130 7030 7130 n/a n/a

SnapMirror 6331 6381 7031 7131 7031 7131 7031 7131


Table 60. N series software licensed function indicators for N3300, N3400, N3600, and N3700 (Models 2859 to2863) (continued)

Description 2859 A10 2859 A20 2859 A11 2859 A21 2862 A102862A20

2863A10

2863A20

SnapLock Compliance 63321 63821 7032 7132 70321 71321 70321 71321

SnapLock Enterprise 63331 63831 7033 7133 70331 71331 70331 71331

SnapMover n/a 6384 n/a 7134 n/a 7134 n/a 7134

SnapRestore 6335 6385 7035 7135 7035 7135 7035 7135

SnapVault Primary 6336 6386 7036 7136 7036 7136 7036 7136

SnapVault Secondary 6337 6387 7037 7137 7037 7137 7037 7137

SnapManager for SAP 6338 6388 7038 7138 7038 7138 7038 7138

SnapManager for Oracle 6339 6389 7039 7139 7039 7139 7039 7139

SnapValidator 6342 6392 6042 6142 7042 7142 7042 7142

Fibre Channel Protocol 6343 6393 7043 7143 7043 7143 7043 7143

Disk Sanitization 6344 6394 7044 7144 7044 7144 7044 7144

SnapManager forExchange

6345 6395 7045 7145 7045 7145 7045 7145

SnapManager for SQL 6346 6396 7046 7146 7046 7146 7046 7146

Advanced SingleInstance Storage

6347 6397 7047 7147 7047 7147 n/a n/a

SnapManager for VI 6348 6398 7048 7148 7048 7148 7048 7148

SnapManager forSharePoint

6349 6399 7049 7149 7049 7149 7049 7149

SnapDrive for UNIX n/a n/a 7076 7176 7076 7176 n/a n/a

SnapDrive for Windows n/a n/a 7077 7177 7077 7177 n/a n/a

Microsoft ExchangeBundle (2500 users)

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 7178 n/a n/a

1 SnapLock Compliance and SnapLock Enterprise require Data ONTAP 7.2.5 or later.


Table 61. N series software licensed function indicators for N5200 and N5500 (Models 2864 to 2865)

Description 2864 A102864A20

2864G10

2864G20 2865 A10

2865A20

2865G10 2865 G20

Data ONTAP 7200 7250 7300 7350 7400 7450 7500 7550

CIFS 7201 7251 7301 7351 7401 7451 7501 7551

HTTP 7202 7252 7302 7352 7402 7452 7502 7552

NFS 7203 7253 7303 7353 7403 7453 7503 7553

CFO n/a 7254 n/a 7354 n/a 7454 n/a 7554

FlexClone 7204 7255 7304 7355 7404 7455 7504 7555

MultiStore 7205 7256 7305 7356 7405 7456 7505 7556

SnapMirror 7206 7257 7306 7357 7406 7457 7506 7557

SnapLock Compliance 7207 7258 n/a n/a 7407 7458 n/a n/a


SnapMover n/a 7260 7308 7360 n/a 7460 7508 7560

SnapRestore 7209 7261 7309 7361 7409 7461 7509 7561



SyncMirror 7214 7266 7314 7366 7414 7466 7514 7566

SnapValidator 7216 7268 7316 7368 7416 7468 7516 7568



SnapManager for Exchange 7219 7271 7318 7370 7419 7471 7518 7570


NearStore 7230 7281 7322 7372 7430 7481 7522 7572

MetroCluster n/a 7273 n/a 7373 n/a 7473 n/a 7573

SAN Bundle n/a 7274 n/a n/a n/a 7474 n/a n/a

iSCSI Protocol 7225 7275 7325 7375 7425 7475 7525 7575


7229 7279 7329 7379 7429 7479 7529 7579


7232 7282 73241 73741 7432 7482 75241 75741




SnapManager for Hyper-V 7241 7291 7341 7391 7441 7491 7541 7591


7249 7299 7349 7399 7449 7499 7549 7599

1 Support for A-SIS on N series gateways requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or later.2 Disk Sanitization on N series gateways is only usable with N series storage expansion units.


Table 62. N series software licensed function indicators for N7600, N7700, N7800, and N7900 (Models 2866 to 2867)

Description2866

A10/A112866

A20/A212866 GWA10/A11

2866 GWA20/A21

2867A10/A11

2867A20/A21

2867 GWA10/A11

2867 GWA20/A21

Data ONTAP 7600 7650 7700 7750 7800 7850 7900 7950

CIFS 7601 7651 7701 7751 7801 7851 7901 7951

HTTP 7602 7652 7702 7752 7802 7852 7902 7952

NFS 7603 7653 7703 7753 7803 7853 7903 7953

CFO n/a 7654 n/a 7754 n/a 7854 n/a 7954

FlexClone 7605 7655 7705 7755 7805 7855 7905 7955

MultiStore 7606 7656 7706 7756 7806 7856 7906 7956

SnapMirror 7607 7657 7707 7757 7807 7857 7907 7957

SnapLock Compliance 7608 7658 7708 7758 7808 7858 7908 7958


SnapMover n/a 7660 7710 7760 n/a 7860 7910 7960

SnapRestore 7611 7661 7711 7761 7811 7861 7911 7961



SyncMirror 7616 7666 7716 7766 7816 7866 7916 7966

SnapValidator 7617 7667 7717 7767 7817 7867 7917 7967


Disk Sanitization 7619 7669 7719 1 7779 1 7819 7869 7919 1 7979 1


7620 7670 7720 7770 7820 7870 7920 7970


NearStore 7622 7672 7722 7772 7822 7872 7922 7972



iSCSI Protocol 7625 7675 7725 7775 7825 7875 7925 7975

FlexScale 7626 7676 7726 7776 7826 7876 7926 7976


7627(A11only)

7677(A21only)

7727(A11only)

7777(A21only)

7827 7877 7927 7977

Performance AcceleratorModule II bundle

n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 7878 n/a 7978

Microsoft Exchange Bundle(10000 users)

n/a 7678 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a


7629 7679 7729 7779 7829 7879 7929 7979

FlexCache for NFS 7630 7680 7730 7780 7830 7680 7930 7980


7632 7682 7732 7782 7832 7882 7932 7982





Table 62. N series software licensed function indicators for N7600, N7700, N7800, and N7900 (Models 2866 to2867) (continued)

Description2866

A10/A112866

A20/A212866 GWA10/A11

2866 GWA20/A21

2867A10/A11

2867A20/A21

2867 GWA10/A11

2867 GWA20/A21



7649 7699 7749 7799 7849 7899 7949 7999

1 Disk Sanitization on N series gateways is only usable with N series storage expansion units.

Table 63. N series software licensed function indicators for N5600 and N5300 (Models 2868 to 2869)

Description2868A10 2868 A20

2868G10

2868G20

2869A10

2869A20

2869G10

2869G20

Data ONTAP 6000 6050 6100 6150 6400 6450 6200 6250

CIFS 7601 6051 7701 6151 7401 7451 7501 7551

HTTP 7602 6052 7702 6152 7402 7452 7502 7552

NFS 7603 6053 7703 6153 7403 7453 7503 7553

CFO n/a 6054 n/a 6154 n/a 7454 n/a 7554

FlexClone 7605 6055 7705 6155 7404 7455 7504 7555

MultiStore 7606 6056 7706 6156 7405 7456 7505 7556

SnapMirror 7607 6057 7707 6157 7406 7457 7506 7557

SnapLock Compliance 7608 6058 n/a n/a 7407 7458 n/a n/a


SnapMover n/a 6060 7710 6160 n/a 7460 7508 7560

SnapRestore 7611 6061 7711 6161 7409 7461 7509 7561



SyncMirror 7616 6066 7716 6166 7414 7466 7514 7566

SnapValidator 7617 6067 7717 6167 7416 7468 7516 7568




7620 6070 7720 6170 7419 7471 7518 7570


NearStore 7622 6072 7722 6172 7430 7481 7522 7572



iSCSI Protocol 7625 6075 7725 6175 7425 7475 7525 7575

FlexScale 7626 6076 7726 6176 7415 7467 7515 7567

Microsoft Exchange Bundle(5000 users)

n/a 6078 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a


7629 6079 7729 6179 7429 7479 7529 7579

FlexCache for NFS 7630 6080 7730 6180 7447 7497 7547 7597


Table 63. N series software licensed function indicators for N5600 and N5300 (Models 2868 to 2869) (continued)

Description2868A10 2868 A20

2868G10

2868G20

2869A10

2869A20

2869G10

2869G20


7632 6082 77321 61821 7432 7482 75241 75741


7633 6083 7733 6183 n/a n/a n/a n/a






7649 6099 7749 6199 7449 7499 7549 7599

1 Support for A-SIS on N series gateways requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or later.2 Disk Sanitization on N series gateways is only usable with N series storage expansion units.

IBM N series host software featuresThis section describes the host software features available for your N series storagesystem. Host software features are installed directly on the host that supports yourN series storage system.

Open Systems SnapVault AgentsOpen Systems SnapVault is designed to be a heterogeneous, disk-to-diskdata protection solution. An OSSV primary system corresponds to a backupclient in the traditional backup architecture. The SnapVault secondarysystem is always an N series system running Data ONTAP. OSSV softwareis designed to protect data residing on the primary system, which can be astorage system attached to a server running an operating system such asAIX, Windows, VMWare or Linux.

Three main components are installed within the OSSV environment:

v The primary system

v The OSSV agent residing on the primary system

v The secondary system (N series) with the SnapVault Secondary feature

A predetermined directory or file system is chosen to be backed up to thesecondary storage. The data set is mapped to a secondary system qtree ona secondary storage system.

Operation Manager Core (OMC)The OMC features are designed to provide a central point of control and toprovide alerts, reports, and configuration tools. These tools are designed tohelp manage storage and content delivery infrastructure, consistent withbusiness requirements, and help maximize availability and reduce total costof ownership.

Protection ManagerThe Protection Manager feature provides backup and replicationmanagement software for an N series disk-based data protectionenvironment. It is designed to help protect data and support highproductivity by providing policy-based management, including when used inautomated data protection configurations.


Protection Manager Disaster Recovery (DR) featuresThe Protection Manager Disaster Recovery (DR) features provide backupand replication management software for an N series disk-based dataprotection environment and disaster recovery. Protection Manager DR isdesigned to help protect data and support high productivity by providingpolicy-based management, including when used in automateddata-protection environments.

Provisioning ManagerProvisioning Manager is an automated, policy-based provisioning softwarefor N series environments. The software is designed to automate manualand repetitive provisioning processes, increasing the productivity ofadministrators and improving the availability of data by ensuring thatprovisioned storage complies with data protection policies.

Single Mailbox RecoverySingle Mailbox Recovery (SMBR) adds advanced function to theSnapManager for Exchange feature. Single Mailbox Recovery restoresindividual mail items from any recent (hourly, daily, or weekly) snapshot.This helps allow rapid search of archived snapshot copies of previouslydeleted messages that are no longer in the current mailbox. Single MailboxRecovery also includes Extract Wizards for Microsoft NT Backup, VERITASBackup Exec, and, optionally, Extract Wizards for CA BrightStor ARCserve,Legato NetWorker, and VERITAS Net Backup. The Extract Wizards aredesigned to restore both private and public exchange information andstored data from tape or disk backups to any alternate location (machine,volume, or folder), thereby helping to eliminate the need for a recoveryserver.

SMBR Administrative ServerSMBR Administrative Server provides a framework that can host centralizedservices for multiple clients and provide both client and server support forSingle Mailbox Recovery 5.0, or later and Single Mailbox RecoveryExtractWizard users. It facilitates server configuration, mailbox permissions,and application auditing services for SMBR environments.

SMBR Content Analysis WizardThe SMBR Content Analysis Wizard (CAW) is designed to enable you toautomate and save search results with Microsoft Exchange by selectingsources, including entire Exchange Database (EDB) files, individualmailboxes from an EDB, or folders from an EDB. Any number of sources isallowed.

SnapDrive™

SnapDrive provides a software application designed to enhance the storagemanagement capabilities in an operating system environment, includingeasier management of dynamic volume, cluster, snapshot, and replicationmanagement.

SnapManager for SQLSnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore timesof SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies.SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databasesusing minimal disk space for each additional full backup.

SnapManager for ExchangeSnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storagemanagement while simplifying configuration, backup, and restore operationsfor Microsoft Exchange databases.


SnapManager for Hyper VSnapManager for Hyper-V is designed to designed to integrate with theMicrosoft Hyper-V virtual server infrastructure and automate crucial taskssuch as back up, restore, recovery, and cloning. It allows connectivity of anynumber of Microsoft Hyper-V servers to one storage controller.

SnapManager for OracleSnapManager for Oracle allows connection of one Oracle host server to astorage controller.

SnapManager for Oracle for WindowsIBM SnapManager for Oracle for Windows is designed to integrate with anOracle database and automate crucial tasks such as backup, restore,database recovery, and cloning. This feature allows connection of oneOracle host server to a storage controller. One of this feature is required foreach Oracle host. Snapmanager for Oracle for Windows is available forOracle databases running on Windows.

SnapManager for VIIBM SnapManager for Virtual Infrastructures (SnapManager VI) is designedto integrate with a virtual server infrastructure and automate crucial taskssuch as back up, restore, recovery, and cloning in a VMWare environment.

Table 64. IBM N series host software

Description Feature

SnapDrive for UNIX - AIX 8024

SnapDrive for UNIX - Solaris 8025

SnapDrive for UNIX - HP-UX 8026

SnapDrive for UNIX - Linux 8027

SnapDrive for Windows 8050

ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO 8052

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - Windows 8100

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - AIX® 8110

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - Linux 8120

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - HP-UX 8121

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - Solaris 8122

FCP/iSCSI Host Utilities - VMWare 8123

SnapManager for Oracle - Windows 8129

SnapManager for Exchange - Host 8131

SnapManager for VI - Host 8133

SnapManager for Hyper V - Host 8135

SnapManager for SAP - Windows 8140

SnapManager for SQL - Host 8141

SnapManager for Oracle 8143

SnapManager for SAP 8145

SnapManager for SharePoint 8147

SnapManager for SharePoint Management Bundle 8149

Single Mailbox Recovery 100 pk 8150



Table 64. IBM N series host software (continued)

Description Feature



Single Mailbox Recovery 5K pk 8154



Single Mailbox Recovery CA-ARCSERVE Extract Wizard 8158

Single Mailbox Recovery Tivoli® Tape Extract Wizard 8159

Single Mailbox Recovery Legato Tape Extract Wizard 8160

Single Mailbox Recovery NetBackup Extract Wizard 8161

Single Mailbox Recovery PST Tape Extract Wizard 8162

Single Mailbox Recovery HP Extract Wizard 8163

Single Mailbox Recovery Commvault Galaxy Ex Wizard 8164

Single Mailbox Recovery UltraBac Extract Wizard 8165

Single Mailbox Recovery Agent for Advanced Search 8166

Single Mailbox Recovery Content Analysis Wizard 8167

Single Mailbox Recovery Content Administrative Server 8168

SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Migrator 100(host)

8181


8182


8183


8184


8185

SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint Archiver (host) 8186

OSSV Windows for Gateways 8201

OSSV Windows for Filers 8202

OSSV Linux for Gateways 8203

OSSV Linux for Filers 8204

OSSV OFM for Gateways 8205

OSSV OFM for Filers 8206

OSSV UNIX for Gateways 8207

OSSV UNIX for Filers 8208

OSSV VMWare for Gateways 8209

OSSV VMWare for Filers 8210

DataFabric Manager Server License 8255

Operations Manager Store Resource Management 8257

Operations Manager Core tier 1 license 8261



Table 64. IBM N series host software (continued)

Description Feature






Protection Manager tier 1 license 8268







Provisioning Manager tier 1 license 8275







Provisioning Manager DR tier 1 license 8282







Operations Manager for N3400 8400

Protection Manager for N3400 8401

Provisioning Manager for N3400 8402

Protection Manager DR for N3400 8403


Chapter 4. Site planning

This chapter contains the following information for site planning for the N seriesstorage systems and storage expansion units.

v “System connectivity requirements”

v “Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirements” on page 114

v “Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal console” on page 116

v “Hardware specifications” on page 118

System connectivity requirementsYour system requires the following types of connections:

Fibre ChannelConnects your appliance to disk shelves, Fibre Channel switches, tapebackup devices, and to other storage devices. They can connect throughthe following media:

v Copper

v Fiber

EthernetConnects your appliance to an Ethernet network through the followingmedia:

v Copper

v Fiber

Fibre Channel connectivityYour appliance connects to disk shelves, Fibre Channel switches, tape backupdevices, and other storage through onboard ports or adapter ports. The followingillustration shows a typical LC connector used to connect Fibre Channel devices.

PORT 1

PORT 2

FIBRECHANNEL

LC connector

FCPTARGET

Figure 4. LC connector


Ethernet connectivityYour appliance connects to a GbE network through either onboard ports or GbEnetwork interface cards (NICs) which support either copper or fiber cabling.

The following table lists maximum distances supported by 50 micron multimodefiber optic cables, with LC or SC connectors, connected to dual-port or quad-portFibre Channel NICs.

Wavelength(Nanometers)

Core size(microns)

ModalBandwidth(MHz/km)

Distance(Meters) Card (speed)

850 50 500 500 1 Gb

300 2 Gb

150 4 Gb

50 8 Gb

2000 860 1 Gb

500 2 Gb

270 4 Gb

150 8 Gb

Copper GbE cabling and NICs: The cabling and network requirements are forGbE and 10GbE networks using copper cabling.

Types: Single-port, dual-port, quad-port

Connector type: RJ-45 for all

Cable type: Category 5, Category 5E or Category 6 unshielded four-pair cablefor 10/100-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-TX

ACT/LNK

PORT A

PORT B

PORT C

ACT/LNK A

ACT/LNK B10=OFF100=GRN1000=ORG

ACT/LNK

10=OFF100=GRN1000=ORG

Quad-port

Copper cable

RJ-45 connector

10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-TX NICs

Dual-port

Single-port

Figure 5. 10Base-T/100Base-T/1000Base-T NICs


Note: Category 5 cables that do not have four-pair wires do not work properlywith 10/100-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-TX speed networks. UseCategory 6 cables for these networks.

Maximum distance: 100m

Fiber GbE cabling and NICs: The following cabling and network requirementsare for GbE networks using optical cabling.

The following table lists maximum distances supported by 50 or 62.5 micronmultimode fiber optic cables, with LC or LC duplex connectors for the1000BASE-SX NICs, connected to single-port or dual-port Fibre Channel GbENICs.

Wavelength(Nanometers)MM laser

Core size(microns)

ModalBandwidth(MHz/km)

Distance(Meters) Card type

850 50 500 550 1000BASE-SX

62.5 160 220

62.5 200 275

62.5 200 33

50 2,000 300

Using older cables with PCI-X and PCIe 10GBASE-SR cardsDo not use less than the recommended 2,000 Mhz/km bandwidth for 10GBASESRcards. The following table lists maximum distances supported by some morecommon cable bandwidths.

Wavelength(Nanometers) Core size (microns)

Modal Bandwidth(MHz/km) Distance (Meters)

850 50 2,000 300

ACT/LNK A

ACT/LNK B

LC connectorACT/LNK

Dual-port

1000Base-SX NICs

Single-port

Figure 6. 1000Base-SX NICs

Chapter 4. Site planning 113

Circuit breaker and power outlet balancing requirementsNEMA If your equipment is mounted in a rack, the total number of circuit breakers

required for your equipment is based on the current draw. You should notload a circuit beyond 80% of the rated limit for the circuit.

For example, if you have a 20A circuit, you should load it to no more than16A of draw.

IEC If your equipment is mounted in a rack, the total number of circuit breakersrequired for your equipment is based on the current draw.

For example, if you have a 16A circuit, you should load it to no more than16A of draw.

Attention: Overloading circuit breakers can lead to tripped breakers or powerbrownouts that can cause system errors.

Balancing the load across PDUsA best practice is to plan how to distribute the total load across the PDU banks priorto plugging your system components into them. You should make each bank loadas equal as possible.

Keep the following considerations in mind when planning to balance the load:

v Balancing the load depends on the number of components being connected andthe location of the component power supply units (PSUs), as shown in thefollowing illustrations.

v You should connect the components to different PDUs on opposite sides of thesystem cabinet, using the illustrations for reference.

v You should plug each component into the PDU outlet directly across from thecomponent, using the illustrations for reference.

Examples of balancing the load with a single componentThe following illustrations show three examples of connecting the PSUs of a singlecomponent, such as a controller in a single chassis, to the system cabinet PDUs.

2

1 3

4

Figure 7. PSUs on opposite sides of the component


1 PSU 1

2 Left PDU outlet

3 PSU 2

4 Right PDU outlet

Examples of balancing the load with two componentsThe following illustrations show three examples of connecting the PSUs of twocomponents, such as a component with two controller modules in a single chassisor two components close together, to the system cabinet PDUs.

1

2

3

4

Figure 8. PSUs on the same side of the component

1

2

3

4

Figure 9. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component

5

6

1

2

10

9

8

37

1114

13

4

12

Figure 10. PSUs on opposite sides of the component


1 Left PDU, bank A

2 Left PDU, bank B

3 Right PDU, bank A

4 Right PDU, bank B

5 PSU 1, component 1

6 Left PDU, bank A outlet


8 Right PDU, bank A outlet


10 Left PDU, bank B outlet


12 Right PDU, bank B outlet

13 Component 1

14 Component 2

Connecting your system to an ASCII terminal consoleThe ASCII terminal console enables you to monitor the boot process, helps youconfigure your system after it boots, and enables you to perform systemadministration.

5

6

1

2

10

9

8

3

14

13

4

12

11

7

Figure 11. PSUs on the same side of the component

7

6

1

2

10

9

8

3

14

13

4

12

11

5

Figure 12. PSUs stacked on the same side of the component


ASCII terminal console wiringThe following table lists the RJ-45 connection pinout for the ASCII terminal consolewiring.

Table 65. RJ-45 connection pinout for the ASCII terminal wiring

Pin number Signal

1 Connected to pin 8

2 Not connected

3 TXD (from system)

4 GND

5 GND

6 RXD (to system)

7 Not connected

8 Connected to pin 1

DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter pin connectionsYou use the DB-9 to RJ-45 console adapter to connect the ASCII terminal consoleto your N6000 series system. Its purpose is to convert the RJ-45 pinout on thesystem to the DB-9 pinout, like those on other IBM products, and all PCs.

The following table lists the console adapter pin number connections between thePC-style DB-9 male connector and the RJ-45 connection on your system.

Table 66. Console adapter pin number connections

RJ-45 Signal DB-9 male

1 [not connected]

2 [not connected]

3 (connected to pin 3 onDB-9)

TXD 3 (connected to pin 3 on RJ-45)


GND 5 (connected to pin 4 on RJ-45)

5 [not connected]


RXD 2 (connected to pin 6 on RJ-45)

7 [not connected] [not connected] 1

8 [not connected] [not connected] 4

[not connected] 6 through 9

Connecting to an ASCII terminal consoleTo connect an ASCII terminal console to the system, complete the following steps.

1. Set the following communications parameters to the same values for both the Nseries system and ASCII terminal.

Table 67. Communication parameters

Parameter Setting

Baud 9600


Table 67. Communication parameters (continued)

Parameter Setting

Data bit 8

Parity None

Stop bits 1

Flow control None

Note: See your terminal documentation for information about changing yourASCII console terminal settings.

2. Connect the DB-9 null modem cable to the DB-9 to RJ-45 adapter cable, andthen connect the RJ-45 end to the console port on the system and the otherend to the ASCII terminal.

Hardware specificationsThe following sections list the hardware specifications for the following N seriesstorage systems and storage expansion units:

v “N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications” on page 119

v “N3700 hardware specifications” on page 131

v “N5000 series system hardware specifications” on page 133

v “N6000 series system hardware specifications” on page 137

v “N6200 series hardware specifications” on page 142

v “N7000 series hardware specifications” on page 145

v “EXN1000 hardware specifications” on page 148

v “EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications” on page 150

v “EXN3000 hardware specifications” on page 153

How the measurements are madeThese published system measurements are conservative. The followingassumptions, conditions, and observations apply to these measurements:

v Line voltage is either 100V AC or 200V AC.

v Current and power are steady state rms values.

v Heat dissipation in BTU/hour is based on Watts multiplied by 3.4129.

v Measurements are taken at room ambient.

v Data is collected for each individual controller, controller module, or storageexpansion unit, not for clustered systems or other combinations (except forplatforms that have two controllers in one chassis).

v Each controller or storage expansion unit is fully populated with a particular drivetype and speed and exercised with multiple threads of a disk stress test program.

v Controllers or controller modules with PCI slots are fully populated and areexercised with test program.

v To account for customer work loads that exceed these conditions, the totalsystem workload is calculated using random disk_qual to obtain electricalcurrent, power, and heat dissipation values.

v If the system configuration causes fan speed to increase or decrease, the data iscollected in that mode.

v Because fan speed can vary for a given set of conditions, the worst case set ofnumbers is presented.


v Electrical requirements for systems containing performance accelerator modulesare measured with the maximum number of these modules installed in thesystem.

Converting watts to volt-amps (VA)Use the following formula to calculate VA from watts:

VA = Watts/PF

PF = 0.95

Watts = Watts listed in the individual tables

Important information about ambient temperatureIBM N series systems have variable speed cooling fans. At higher ambienttemperatures, the fans will spin faster and consume more power. This maycounteract some energy savings anticipated by rasing the ambient temperature.

You should operate your system within the ambient temperature range of 10-40° C.As the temperature increases, the reliability and life expectancy of electronics andhard disk drives decreases.

N3300, N3400 and N3600 hardware specifications

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware.

CAUTION:Two people are required to lift the N3300 or N3400 system during installation.Three people are required to lift the N3600 system during installation.

Note: Operating at the extremes of the environmental requirements might increasethe risk of device failure.

Table 68. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system physical characteristics

Weight 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11,2859-A21

Active/active (or high availability)controller with 12 SAS disk drives:31.1 kg (68.6 lb)

Single controller with no diskdrives: 19.5 kg (43.0 lb)

2862-A10, 2862-A20 Active/active (or high availability)controller with 20 SAS disk drives:51 kg (112 lb)

Single controller with no diskdrives: 32.6 kg (72 lb)

Rack units 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11,2859-A21

2U

2862-A10, 2862-A20 4U

Height 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11,2859-A21

8.85 cm (3.5 in.)

2862-A10, 2862-A20 17.75 cm (6.95 in.)

Width All models 44.6 cm (17.6 in.)


Table 68. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system physical characteristics (continued)

Depth 2859-A10, 2859-A20, 2859-A11,2859-A21

56.9 cm (22.4 in)

2862-A10, 2862-A20 58.5 cm (23 in)

Table 69. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system clearance dimensions

Front-cooling 10 in. (25.4 cm)

Rear-cooling 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Front-maintenance 30 in. (76.2 cm)

Rear-maintenance 30 in. (76.2 cm)

Table 70. N3300, N3400 and N3600 system environmental requirements

Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 158° F

(-40° C to 70° C)

Relative humidity 20 to 80%noncondensing

Recommended operating temperature relative humidity range 40 to 55%

Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)

Maximum altitude 3050 m (10,000 ft.)

Acoustic level N3300, N3400 54 dBA @ 23° C

7.2 bels @ 23° C

N3600 49 dBA @ 23° C

6.7 bels @ 23° C

Table 71 lists the maximum electrical power for the N3300, N3400 and N3600

Table 71. N3300, N3400 and N3600 maximum electrical power

System Maximum electrical power

N3300 and N3400 100-240 V ac, 10-4 A, 50-60 Hz

N3600 100-240 V ac, 12-5 A, 50-60 Hz

Notes:

1. In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSUand high fan speed, with power distributed over one power cord. Per PSUindicates typical power needs, per PSU, for a system operating under normalcondition. System indicates typical power needs for two PSUs in a systemoperating under normal condition and power distributed over two power cords.

2. 600 GB SAS drives are supported for the N3300, N3400 and N3600. However,electrical requirements data for the 600 GB SAS drives are not currentlyavailable for the N3300 and N3600.


3. 2 TB SATA drives are supported for the N3300 and N3400. However, electricalrequirements data for the 2 TB SATA drives are not currently available.

Table 72. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case Per PSU System


Input currentmeasured, A

144 GBSASdrives

3.83 1.7 3.39 1.94 0.94 1.87

300 GBSASdrives

4.44 1.95 3.89 2.23 1.08 2.16

450 GBSASdrives

4.44 1.95 3.89 2.23 1.08 2.16

500 GBSATAdrives

3.22 1.55 3.09 1.68 0.81 1.61

750 GBSATAdrives

3.37 1.61 3.22 1.69 0.83 1.66

1 TBSATAdrives

3.37 1.61 3.22 1.69 0.83 1.66

Input powermeasured, W

144 GBSASdrives

377 165 330 371 174 348

300 GBSASdrives

439 191 381 431 204 407

450 GBSASdrives

439 191 381 431 204 407

500 GBSATAdrives

319 151 301 322 147 294

750 GBSATAdrives

332 158 316 327 152.5 305

1 TBSATAdrives

332 158 316 327 152.5 305


Table 72. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Thermaldissipation,BTU/hr

144 GBSASdrives

1287 563 1125 1264 593 1185

300 GBSASdrives

1497 649 1298 1470 669 1338

450 GBSASdrives

1497 649 1298 1470 669 1338

500 GBSATAdrives

1088 514 1028 1099 501 1002

750 GBSATAdrives

1133 539 1077 1114 520 1039

1 TBSATAdrives

1133 539 1077 1114 520 1039

Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

Table 73. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

4.69 2.05 4.09 2.34 1.11 2.22

300 GBSASdrives

4.94 2.38 4.75 2.45 1.19 2.37

450 GBSASdrives

4.94 2.38 4.75 2.45 1.19 2.37

500 GBSATAdrives

3.94 1.90 3.80 1.97 0.97 1.93

750 GBSATAdrives

4.13 1.95 3.89 2.09 0.99 1.98

1 TBSATAdrives

4.13 1.95 3.89 2.09 0.99 1.98


Table 73. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

464 200 400 452 210 419

300 GBSASdrives

488 233 465 476 224 448

450 GBSASdrives

488 233 465 476 224 448

500 GBSATAdrives

389 186 372 381 180 360

750 GBSATAdrives

409 191 382 404 186 372

1 TBSATAdrives

409 191 382 404 186 372


144 GBSASdrives

1583 683 1365 1542 714.5 1429

300 GBSASdrives

1665 794 1587 1624 715 1527

450 GBSASdrives

1665 794 1587 1624 715 1527

500 GBSATAdrives

1328 634 1268 1298 614 1227

750 GBSATAdrives

1395 651 1302 1377 634 1268

1 TBSATAdrives

1395 651 1302 1377 634 1268


Table 74. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




1.67 0.8 1.60 0.9 0.45 0.89


165 77 153 160 75 149


Table 74. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




563 261 521 544 253 506

Input powerfrequency, Hz

50 to 60

Table 75. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




2.63 1.12 2.23 1.34 0.59 1.18


254 108 215 240 104 208


866 366 731 818 355 709


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




300 GBSASdrives

4.08 1.98 3.96 2.3 1 2

450 GBSASdrives

3.96 1.92 3.84 1.97 0.97 1.94

600 GBSASdrives

3.87 1.92 3.83 1.91 0.96 1.91

500 GBSATAdrives

3.25 1.59 3.17 1.62 0.81 1.62

750 GBSATAdrives

3.38 1.64 3.27 1.69 0.84 1.68

1 TBSATAdrives

3.62 1.77 3.53 1.81 0.90 1.8



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




300 GBSASdrives

404 194 387 392 189 378

450 GBSATAdrives

391 188 375 379 184 367

600 GBSASdrives

387 188 376 368 181 361

500 GBSATAdrives

319 155 310 310 151 301

750 GBSATAdrives

333 161 322 324 157 314

1 TBSATAdrives

357 173 345 347 169 337


300 GBSASdrives

1378 660 1320 1337 645 1289

450 GBSASdrives

1333 640 1279 1292 626 1252

600 GBSASdrives

1319 641 1282 1254 616 1231

500 GBSATAdrives

1088 529 1057 1057 513 1026

750 GBSATAdrives

1136 549 1098 1105 536 1071

1 TBSATAdrives

1217 589 1177 1183 575 1149




Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




300 GBSASdrives

4.85 2.33 4.66 2.39 1.18 2.35

450 GBSASdrives

4.70 2.27 4.53 2.32 1.14 2.28

600 GBSASdrives

4.44 2.16 4.32 2.18 1.09 2.18

500 GBSATAdrives

3.95 1.92 3.84 1.97 0.98 1.95

750 GBSATAdrives

4.10 1.99 3.98 2.04 1.01 2.01

1 TBSATAdrives

4.36 2.12 4.23 2.16 1.06 2.12


300 GBSASdrives

480 229 457 464 224 447

450 GBSASdrives

464 223 445 451 216 432

600 GBSASdrives

440 212 424 425 208 415

500 GBSATAdrives

390 188 376 379 184 367

750 GBSATAdrives

405 195 389 393 191 381

1 TBSATAdrives

4.29 207 414 416 202 403



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




300 GBSASdrives

1637 779 1558 1582 762 1524

450 GBSASdrives

1582 759 1518 1538 737 1473

600 GBSASdrives

1500 723 1445 1449 708 1415

500 GBSATAdrives

1330 641 1282 1292 626 1252

750 GBSATAdrives

1381 664 1327 1340 650 1299

1 TBSATAdrives

1463 706 1412 1419 687 1374



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




1.4 0.7 1.4 0.77 0.39 0.78


137 67 133 134 65 130


467 227 454 457 222 443


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




1.96 0.98 1.95 1.02 0.52 1.04


192 94 187 188 91 182


655 319 638 641 311 621


Table 79. N3400 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

5.64 2.38 4.76 2.82 1.33 2.65

300 GBSASdrives

6.62 2.96 5.92 3.27 2.76 5.52

450 GBSASdrives

6.62 2.96 5.92 3.27 1.38 2.76

500 GBSATAdrives

4.64 2.18 4.36 2.33 1.09 2.17

750 GBSATAdrives

5.07 2.26 4.51 2.46 1.20 2.40

1 TBSATAdrives

5.07 2.26 4.51 2.46 1.20 2.40


144 GBSASdrives

560 233 465 547 251 502

300 GBSASdrives

658 292 583 636 262 523

450 GBSASdrives

658 292 583 636 266 523

500 GBSATAdrives

459 213 425 447 204 408

750 GBSATAdrives

504 220 439 474 224 447

1 TBSATAdrives

504 220 439 474 224 447



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

1909 794 1587 1864 855 1710

300 GBSASdrives

2243 994 1988 2165 891 1782

450 GBSASdrives

2243 994 1988 2165 891 1782

500 GBSATAdrives

1564 724 1448 1523 696 1392

750 GBSATAdrives

1718 749 1497 1617 762 1523

1 TBSATAdrives

1718 749 1497 1617 762 1523



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

6.31 2.84 5.68 3.09 1.45 2.89

300 GBSASdrives

7.51 3.34 6.68 3.73 1.71 3.41

450 GBSASdrives

7.51 3.34 6.68 3.73 1.71 3.41

500 GBSATAdrives

5.74 2.84 5.67 2.89 1.33 2.65

750 GBSATAdrives

5.91 2.74 5.74 2.97 1.39 2.77

1 TBSATAdrives

5.91 2.74 5.47 2.97 1.39 2.77



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




144 GBSASdrives

628 279 558 600 275 550

300 GBSASdrives

747 330 659 728 328 655

450 GBSASdrives

747 330 659 728 328 655

500 GBSATAdrives

567 277 554 561 252 503

750 GBSATAdrives

585 268 536 575 262 524

1 TBSATAdrives

585 268 536 575 262 524


144 GBSASdrives

2142 951 1902 2044 938 1876

300 GBSASdrives

2547 1124 2247 2483 1116 2232

450 GBSASdrives

2547 1124 2247 2483 1116 2232

500 GBSATAdrives

1932 946 1891 1913 857 1714

750 GBSATAdrives

1996 914 1827 1962 893 1785

1 TBSATAdrives

1996 914 1827 1962 893 1785



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




2.10 0.90 1.80 1.10 0.50 0.99


205 86.5 173 198 84 168


Table 82. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




698 295 589 675 287 574


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V




2.62 1.19 2.37 1.35 0.62 1.24


256 114 227 250 111 222


874 387 773 851 379 758


50 to 60

N3700 hardware specifications

The following tables list the physical characteristics and environmental requirementsfor your N3700 storage system.

DANGER

Three people are required to lift the N3700 during installation. Do notremove the disk drives to reduce the weight.


Table 84. N3700 physical characteristics

Weight With maximum number ofdisk drives

78.8 lb (35.8 kg)

Empty 50.6 lb (23 kg)

Rack units 3U

Height 5.25 in. (13.3 cm)

Width 17.6 in. (44.8 cm)

Depth 20 in. (50.9 cm)

Table 85. N3700 clearance dimensions

Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.3 cm)


Table 85. N3700 clearance dimensions (continued)

Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Rear-maintenance All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Table 86. N3700 environmental requirements


(10° C to 40° C)


(20° C to 25° C)


(-40° C to 65° C)

Relative humidity 10 to 90% noncondensing

Recommended operating temperaturerelative humidity range

40 to 55%


Maximum altitude2, 3 3050 m (10,000 ft.)

Acoustic level1, 4 56.4 dBA @ 23° C

5.64 bels @ 23° C

1. Noise emission notes:a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator

position (if any) for a production series of machines.c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at

the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in

conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.f. N/A - not available.

2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)above 915 m (3000 ft).

3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)above 305 m (1000 ft).

4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center ofthe unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.

5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformancewith ISO 9296.

Table 87. N3700 electrical requirements

Input voltage Disk drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case

TypicalsinglePSU/system Worst-case

TypicalsinglePSU/system


10K drives 3.12 1.88/3.76 1.52 0.92/1.83

15K drives 3.83 2.15/4.30 1.83 1.04


10K drives 311 187.5/375 299 177.5/355

15K drives 382 214.5/429 361 202.5/405


Table 87. N3700 electrical requirements (continued)

Input voltage Disk drives

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case

TypicalsinglePSU/system Worst-case


Thermal dissipation,BTU/hr

10K drives 1062 639.5/1279 1020 606/1212

15K drives 1302 731.5/1463 1230 690/1380


Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed.Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

N5000 series system hardware specifications

The following tables list the hardware characteristics and environmental andelectrical requirements for N5000 series systems.

DANGER

The weight of this part or unit is between 32 and 55 kg (70.5 and 121.2 lb).It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)


svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

Table 88. N5000 series physical characteristics

Weight 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10,2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,2869-A10, 2869-G10

75 lb (34 kg)

2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20,2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,2869-A20, 2869-G20

150 lb (68 kg)

Rack units 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10,2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,2869-A10, 2869-G10

3U

2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20,2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,2869-A20, 2869-G20

6U

Height 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10,2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,2869-A10, 2869-G10

5.12 in. (13 cm)

2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20,2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,2869-A20, 2869-G20

10.2 in. (26 cm)


Table 88. N5000 series physical characteristics (continued)

Width All models 17.7 in. (44.9 cm)

Depth All models 61 cm (24 in) without cablemanagement tray

76.2 cm (30 in) with cablemanagement tray

Table 89. N5000 series clearance dimensions

Front-cooling 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear-cooling 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Rear-maintenance 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Table 90. N5000 series environmental requirements


(10° C to 40° C)


(20° C to 25° C)


(-40° C to 65° C)


Recommended operating temperature relative humidityrange

40 to 55%



Acoustic level1, 4 54 dBA @ 23° C

5.4 bels @ 23° C









In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU andhigh fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case


Worst-case


Worst-case



3.39 1.2/2.4 1.77 0.71/1.40 8.2 2.85/5.70


336 118/236 329 115/229 328 113/226


1144 402.5/805 1122 392/783 1118 286/771


50 to 60 n/a n/a


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case


Worst-case


Worst-case



3.66 1.7/3.4 1.9 0.95/1.9 7.94 3.7/7.4


363 169/228 358 165/330 318 148/296


1238 576/1152 1221 564/1127 1084 506/1011


50 to 60 n/a n/a

Table 93. N5300 electrical requirements with one Performance Accelerator Module card

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case,singlePSU







4.21 1.82/3.63 2.21 1.04/2.07 9.74 4.12/8.21


418 178/355 417 175/350 389 164/328


1425 606/1212 1422 597/1193 1328 560/1119


50 to 60 n/a n/a



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case


Worst-case


Worst-case



3.88 1.7/3.4 2.04 0.95/1.9 9.49 4.0/8.0


386 164/328 384 164/327 380 160/319


1317 560/1119 1309 559/1116 1295 545/1089


50 to 60 n/a n/a


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V

Worst-case


Worst-case


Worst-case



4.03 1.85/3.7 2.06 1.05/2.1 10.57 4.7/9.4


400 181/362 387 178/355 423 188/376


1365 617/1233 1320 606/1212 1442 642/1283


50 to 60 n/a n/a

Table 96. N5600 electrical requirements with two Performance Accelerator Module cards

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V








4.51 2.04/4.08 2.29 1.22/2.43 10.67 4.63/9.26


449 201/402 438 208/415 427 185/370


1530 685/1369 1493 707/1414 1455 632/1263


50 to 60 n/a n/a


N6000 series system hardware specifications

svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

DANGER

The weight of this part or unit is between 44 and 54 kg (97 and 118 lb). Ittakes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for the N6000 seriessystem.



Weight v A10: 44.4 kg (97.8 lb)

v A20: 52.2 kg (115 lb)

v A11: 44.9 kg (99 lb)

v A21: 53.2 kg (117.3 lb)

v A12: 44.8 kg (98.8 lb)

v A22: 53.1 kg (117 lb)

Rack units 6U

Height 25.9 cm (10.2 in.)

Width 44.7 cm (17.6 in.)

Depth 61.7 cm (24.3 in.) without cabletray

71.3 cm (28.1 in.) with cable tray


Front-cooling All versions 15.2 cm (6 in.)

Rear-cooling All versions 30.5 cm (12 in.)

Front-maintenance All versions 76.2 cm (30 in.)

Rear-maintenance All versions 91.4 cm (36 in.)



(10° C to 40° C)


(20° C to 25° C)


(-40° C to 65° C)


Table 99. N6000 series environmental requirements (continued)



40 to 55%



Acoustic level 56 dBA @ 23° C

7.4 bels @ 23° C

The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N6000 series systemsand the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N6000 seriessystems.

Table 100. N6000 series systems maximum electrical power


N6000 series systems 100-240 V ac, 12-8 A, 47-63 Hz

In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU andhigh fan speed. Typical per PSU/System, two PSUs indicates a system running onePSU on one circuit and a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

Table 101. N6040 electrical requirements–one controller module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V


Typical Worst-case,singlePSU

Typical

Per PSUSystem,two PSUs Per PSU

System,two PSUs


3.98 1.89 3.77 1.97 0.97 1.93


396 187 373 385 183 366


1350 636 1272 1313 625 1249


50 to 60

Table 102. N6040 electrical requirements–two controller modules

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


7.38 2.99 5.97 3.60 1.49 2.98


736 297 594 712 291 581


Table 102. N6040 electrical requirements–two controller modules (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


2509 1013 2026 2427 991 1981


50 to 60

Table 103. N6040 electrical requirements with two PAM I or II cards–one controller module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


4.06 1.93 3.86 2.01 0.99 1.98


402 192 383 396 190 379


1372 654 1307 1352 647 1293


50 to 60

Table 104. N6040 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards–two controller modules

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


7.69 3.29 6.58 3.75 1.58 3.15


769 328 655 745 315 630


2625 1117 2234 2543 1075 2150


50 to 60



Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


4.80 2.25 4.50 2.38 1.16 2.32


476 220 440 460 225 450


1625 751 1502 1570 768 1535


50 to 60


Input voltage 100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical

Per PSU System,two PSUs

Per PSU System,two PSUs


9.25 3.88 7.76 4.40 2.15 4.30


916 380 760 860 419 838


3126 1297 2594 2935 1430 2860


50 to 60

Table 107. N6060 electrical requirements with two PAM I or II cards–one controller module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


4.90 2.31 4.62 2.44 1.19 2.38


487 227 453 478 230 460


1662 773 1546 1631 785 1570


50 to 60


Table 108. N6060 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards–two controller modules

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


9.65 4.09 8.17 4.51 2.28 4.55


959 405 809 890 441 882


3273 1381 2761 3037 1505 3010


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


5.07 2.37 4.74 2.52 1.19 2.38


505 235 470 493 230 459


1722 801 1602 1680 782 1564


50 to 60


Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


9.74 4.07 8.14 4.69 2.02 4.03


969 405 810 930 394 788


3305 1381 2761 3170 1343 2686


50 to 60


Table 111. N6070 electrical requirements with four PAM I or II cards–one controller module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


5.27 2.49 4.98 2.62 1.25 2.5


525 247 494 513 241 482


1790 843 1685 1749 822 1644


50 to 60

Table 112. N6070 electrical requirements with eight PAM I or II cards–two controllermodules

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


10.54 4.49 8.98 5.08 2.22 4.44


1048 447 894 1006 434 868


3574 1525 3049 3430 1480 2960


50 to 60

N6200 series hardware specifications


svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

DANGER





Weight v 2858-C10 (single enclosurewith one controller): 29.7.kg(65.4 lb)

v 2858-C20 and 2858-C21 (singleenclosure with two controllers):34.6 kg (76.2 lb)

v 2858-E11 (single enclosure withone controller and one IOXM):32.9 kg (72.6lb)

v 2858-E21 (two enclosures,each with one controller andone IOXM): 65.9 kg (145.2 lb)

Rack units 3U per enclosure

Height 13 cm (5.12 in.)

Width 44.7 cm (17.6 in.)

Depth 61 cm (24 in.) without bezel64.5 cm (25.4 in.) with beze1


Airflow Front 25.4 cm (10 in.)

Rear 30.5 cm (12 in.)

Service Front 76.2 cm (30.5 in.)

Rear 76.2 cm (30.5 in.)


Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F (10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F (20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 158° F (-40° C to 70° C)

Operating relative humidity 20 to 80% noncondensing

Nonoperating relative humidity 10 to 95% noncondensing (inoriginal container)


40 to 55%



Acoustic level 55.5 dBA, 7.5 bels at 23° C

The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N6200 series systemsand the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N6200 seriessystems.

Table 116. N6200 series systems maximum electrical power


N6200 series systems 100-240 V ac, 12-8 A, 50-60 Hz.


In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU andhigh fan speed. Typical Per PSU/System, two PSUs indicates a system running onePSU on one circuit and a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

Table 117. N6210 electrical requirements–one controller node, with one 256-Gb and one512-Gb Flash Cache module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


4.22 1.52 3.03 1.97 0.8 1.6


421 150 299 411 146 292


1437 511 1021 1403 499 997


50 to 60

Table 118. N6210 electrical requirements–two controller nodes, with one 256-Gb FlashCache module per node

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


6.27 2.32 4.64 2.91 1.13 2.25


626 231 462 610 225 450


2137 789 1577 2082 768 1536


50 to 60

Table 119. N6240 electrical requirements–two controller nodes, with one 256-Gb and one512-Gb Flash Cache module per controller node

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


6.37 2.35 4.70 2.94 1.14 2.27


635 233 466 618 228 455


Table 119. N6240 electrical requirements–two controller nodes, with one 256-Gb and one512-Gb Flash Cache module per controller node (continued)

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


2168 796 1591 2110 777 1553


50 to 60

Table 120. N6240 electrical requirements–one controller node, with one 256-Gb and one512-Gb Flash Cache module, and one I/O expansion module

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


5.01 1.86 3.71 2.33 0.94 1.87


500 184 368 487 180 359


1707 628 1256 1663 613 1226


50 to 60

N7000 series hardware specifications

svc001

68

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

The following tables list the hardware characteristics and environmental andelectrical requirements for N7000 series systems.

DANGER




Table 121. N7000 series system physical characteristics

Weight 2866-A11, 2867-A11 54.8 kg (121 lb)

2866-A21, 2867-A21 109.6 kg (242 lb)

Rack units 2866-A11, 2867-A11 6U

2866-A21, 2867-A21 12U

Height 2866-A11, 2867-A11 263 mm (10.4 in)

2866-A21, 2867-A21 526 mm (20.8 in)

Width 446 mm (17.6 in)

Depth 695 mm (27.4 in) without cablemanagement tray782 mm (30.8 in) with cablemanagement tray

Table 122. N7000 series system clearance dimensions

Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.2 cm)

Front-maintenance All versions 25 in. (63.5 cm)

Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Rear-maintenance All versions 40 in. (102 cm)

Table 123. N7000 series system environmental requirements

Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F(10° C to 40° C)

Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F(20° C to 25° C)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 149° F(-40° C to 65° C)


Recommended operating temperature relativehumidity range

40 to 55%


Maximum altitude,2 3 2133 m (7,000 ft.)

Acoustic level1, 4 49 dBA @ 23° C5 bels @ 23° C


Table 123. N7000 series system environmental requirements (continued)









In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU andhigh fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

Table 124. N7600 and N7700 electrical requirements

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-caseTypical singlePSU/system Worst-case

Typical singlePSU/system

Input current measured,A

9.26 2.75/5.4 4.6 1.4/2.8

Input power measured,W

922 266/531 882 255/509


3144 906/1812 3008 869/1737

Input power frequency,Hz

50 to 60

Table 125. N7600 and N7700 electrical requirements with four Performance AcceleratorModule I or II cards

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-case,single PSU





10.15 3.03/6.05 5.06 1.65/3.29


1009 293/585 969 289/578


3440 998/1996 3305 985/1969


50 to 60


Table 126. N7800 and N7900 electrical requirements

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V

Worst-caseTypical singlePSU/system Worst-case



9.72 2.8/5.6 4.84 1.45/2.9


966 274/548 928 266/532


3293 935/1870 3166 908/1816


50 to 60

Table 127. N7800 and N7900 electrical requirements with five Performance AcceleratorModule I or II cards

Input voltage

100 to 120V 200 to 240V






12.11 3.85/7.70 5.97 2.07/4.14


1203 376/752 1158 368/736


4104 1283/2566 3950 1255/2509


50 to 60

EXN1000 hardware specificationsThe following table lists the characteristics and requirements for the EXN1000storage expansion unit.


DANGER

Three people are required to lift the EXN1000 during installation.


Table 128. EXN1000 physical characteristics


68 lbs (30.8 kg)

Empty 50.6 lbs (23 kg)

Rack units 3


Width 17.6 in. (44.7 cm)



Table 129. EXN1000 clearance dimensions

Front–cooling 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear–cooling and maintenance 12 in. (30.5)

Front–maintenance 25 in. (55.9 cm)

Table 130. EXN1000 environmental requirements

Operating temperature range 41° F to 104° F

(5° C to 40° C)


(-40° C to 60° C)


Acoustic level1, 4 58 dBA @ 23° C









Table 131. EXN1000 electrical requirements (7.2K speed drives, HE PSUs)

Input voltage Size (GB)

100 to 120V 200 to 240V


Typical Worst-case,single PSU

Typical


System,two PSUs


750 GB 2.72 1.24 2.48 1.28 0.61 1.21

1 TB 2.51 1.19 2.38 1.22 0.59 1.17

2 TB 2.50 1.17 2.34 1.28 0.61 1.21


750 GB 271 124 247 254 120 240

1 TB 250 119 237 243 117 233

2 TB 249 115 230 246 107 214

Thermaldissipation, BTU/hr

750 GB 924 421 842 866 410 819

1 TB 853 404 808 829 398 795

2 TB 849 392 784 839 365 730


Table 132. EXN1000 electrical requirements (7.2K speed drives)


100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


250 GB 2.79 1.36 2.72 1.38 0.70 1.39

320 GB 2.85 1.56 3.12 1.43 0.78 1.56

500 GB 2.94 1.45 2.9 1.43 0.74 1.47

750 GB 3.42 1.61 3.22 1.63 0.53 1.60

1 TB 3.15 1.55 3.10 1.55 0.78 1.56


250 GB 279 136 271 271 132 264

320 GB 284 155 310 283 152 304

500 GB 293 144 288 286 142 283

750 GB 341 161 321 323 155 309

1 TB 315 154 308 309 150 300


250 GB 953 462 923 923 450 900

320 GB 968 529 1058 964 518 1035

500 GB 998 492 983 975 482 964

750 GB 1163 548 1095 1103 527 1054

1 TB 1073 525 1050 1054 512 1024

EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your EXN2000 orEXN4000 storage expansion unit.

DANGER

Three people are required to lift the EXN2000 or EXN4000 duringinstallation.

Table 133. EXN2000 and EXN4000 physical characteristics


77 lbs (35 kg)

Empty 50.6 lbs (23 kg)

Rack units 3U


Width 17.6 in. (44.8 cm)


Table 134. EXN2000 and EXN4000 clearance dimensions

Front–cooling 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear–cooling and maintenance 12 in. (30.5)

Front–maintenance 25 in. (55.9 cm)


Table 135. EXN2000 and EXN4000 environmental requirements


(10° C to 40° C)


(20° C to 25° C)


(-40° C to 65° C)



40 to 55%



Acoustic level1, 4 56.4 dBA @ 23° C

5.64 bels @ 23° C









Table 136. EXN2000 electrical requirements (10K speed drives)


100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


72 GB 3.31 1.72 3.43 1.61 0.84 1.67

144 GB 3.56 1.72 3.43 1.75 0.87 1.73

288 GB 4.0 1.95 3.89 1.96 0.95 1.9


72 GB 330 171 342 318 162 323

144 GB 356 171 342 348 167 334

288 GB 399 194 387 420 187 374


72 GB 1125 584 1167 1084 552 1103

144 GB 1215 584 1167 1185 570 1140

288 GB 1362 660 1320 1433 638 1275




100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


72 GB 3.41 1.82 3.63 1.67 0.89 1.78

144 GB 3.96 1.88 3.75 1.93 0.94 1.88

288 GB 4.43 2.16 4.32 2.23 1.07 2.13

450 GB 4.43 2.16 4.32 2.23 1.07 2.13


72 GB 340 181 362 331 173 345

144 GB 395 187 373 383 183 365

288 GB 443 216 431 443 208 415

450 GB 443 216 431 443 208 415


72 GB 1159 617 1234 1129 589 1178

144 GB 1347 636 1272 1245 653 1305

288 GB 1512 735 1470 1512 707 1414

450 GB 1512 735 1470 1512 707 1414



100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


72 GB 2.81 1.51 3.01 1.38 0.76 1.51

144 GB 3.44 1.68 3.36 1.68 0.83 1.66

288 GB 3.89 1.89 3.78 1.90 0.94 1.87


72 GB 279 150 299 272 145 290

144 GB 344 167 334 333 161 321

288 GB 388 189 377 376 182 364


72 GB 953 510 1020 926 495 990

144 GB 1174 570 1140 1137 548 1095

288 GB 1324 644 1287 1283 621 1242



100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


72 GB 3.42 1.83 3.65 1.66 0.91 1.82

144 GB 3.54 1.73 3.45 1.73 0.87 1.73

288 GB 4.52 2.14 4.27 2.23 1.06 2.12

450 GB 4.52 2.14 4.27 2.23 1.06 2.12


Table 139. EXN4000 electrical requirements (15K speed drives) (continued)


100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


72 GB 342 182 363 329 177 353

144 GB 354 172 344 343 167 334

288 GB 451 213 426 443 207 414

450 GB 451 213 426 443 207 414


72 GB 1167 619 1238 1222 602 1204

144 GB 1208 587 1174 1170 570 1140

288 GB 1538 726 1452 1512 705 1410

450 GB 1538 726 1452 1512 705 1410

Table 140. EXN4000 electrical requirements (HE PSUs, 15K speed drives)


100 to 120V 200 to 240V



Typical


System,two PSUs


144 GB 2.82 1.33 2.66 1.36 0.65 1.30

288 GB 3.39 1.65 3.29 1.75 0.81 1.61

450 GB 3.59 1.65 3.29 1.75 0.81 1.61

600 GB 3.44 1.62 3.24 1.70 0.84 1.68


144 GB 281 133 265 270 130 259

288 GB 358 164 328 349 161 321

450 GB 358 164 328 349 161 321

600 GB 342 161 321 332 158 316


144 GB 959 452 904 921 442 883

288 GB 1221 560 1119 1191 548 1095

450 GB 1221 560 1119 1191 548 1095

600 GB 1166 547 1094 1132 539 1077

Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed.Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

EXN3000 hardware specifications

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your EXN3000storage expansion unit.


DANGER

Three people are required to lift the EXN3000 during installation.

Note: For detailed EXN3000 electrical requirements with SAS and SATA drives,see Table 145 on page 155 and Table 146 on page 155.


Table 141. EXN3000 physical characteristics


98.3 lbs (44.6 kg)

Without disk drives 52.8 lbs (24 kg)

Empty 21.5 lbs (9.8 kg)

Rack units 4U


Width 17.7 in. (44.9 cm)

Depth 25.7 in. (65.4 cm)

Table 142. EXN3000 clearance dimensions

Front (cooling) 6 in. (15.3 cm)

Rear (cooling and maintenance) 12 in. (30.5 cm)

Front (maintenance) 25 in. (55.95 cm)

Table 143. EXN3000 environmental requirements

Operating temperature maximum range 10° C to 40° C

(50° F to 104° F)

Operating temperature recommended range 20° C to 25° C

(68° F to 77° F)

Nonoperating temperature range -40° C to 65° C

(-40° F to 149° F)

Recommended operating range (relative humidity) 40 to 55%

Maximum operating range (relative humidity) 20 to 80% (non-condensing)

Non-operating range (relative humidity) 10 to 95% (non-condensing).



Acoustic level v Idle

– 5.7 bels (SATA drives)

– 6.0 bels (SAS drives)

v Operating

– 6.7 bels (SATA drives)

– 7.0 bels (SAS drives)


Table 144. EXN3000 electrical requirements

Wet bulb (caloric value) v 2,201 Btu/hr (fully loaded shelf, SAS drives)

v 1,542 Btu/hr (fully loaded shelf, SATA drives)

Maximum electrical power 100 to 240 VAC 16-6 A (8-3A max per inlet); 50/60Hz

Nominal Electrical Power v 100 to 120 VAC, 6 A; 200 to 240 VAC, 3 A, 50/60 Hz(SAS drives)

v 100 to 120 VAC, 4.4 A; 200 to 240 VAC, 2.1 A, 50/60 Hz(SATA drives)

Table 145. EXN3000 electrical requirements–SAS drives

Inputvoltage

Size(GB)

100 to 120V 200 to 240V (200V actual) 200 to 240V (215V actual)

Worst-case,twoPSUs

Typical Worst-case,twoPSUs

Typical Worst-case,twoPSUs

Typical

PerPSUpair

System,fourPSUs

PerPSUpair

System,fourPSUs

PerPSUpair

System,fourPSUs


300 5.5 3.0 6.0 2.8 1.5 3.0 2.6 1.4 2.8

450 6.0 3.15 6.3 3.0 1.6 3.2 2.8 1.5 3.0

600 5.98 2.86 5.71 2.99 1.44 2.87 n/a


300 550 300 600 560 300 600 559 301 602

450 600 315 630 600 320 640 602 323 645

600 595 284 567 584 274 547 n/a


300 1877 1024 2048 1911 1024 2048 1908 1027 2055

450 2047 1075 2150 2047 1092 2184 2054 1101 2201

600 2028 917 1833 1991 933 1865 n/a

Notes:

1. Worst-case indicates a system running with two PSUs, high fan speed, andpower distributed over two power cords.

2. Per PSU pair indicates typical power needs, per PSU pair, for a systemoperating under normal conditions.

3. System indicates typical power needs for four PSUs in a system operatingunder normal conditions and power distributed over four power cords.

Note: Depending on the disk drive type, your EXN3000 might have two or fourpower supplies. EXN3000s with SAS disk drives have four powersupplies and require the use of four power outlets.

Table 146. EXN3000 electrical requirements–SATA drives

Inputvoltage

Size(GB)





Typical

PerPSU

System,twoPSUs

PerPSU

System,twoPSUs

PerPSU

System,twoPSUs


500 4.3 2.2 4.4 2.1 1.1 2.2 1.9 1.05 2.1

1 TB 4.41 2.21 4.42 2.21 1.14 2.27 1.9 1.05 2.1

2 TB 4.72 2.31 4.62 2.42 1.21 2.42 n/a


Table 146. EXN3000 electrical requirements–SATA drives (continued)

Inputvoltage

Size(GB)





Typical

PerPSU

System,twoPSUs

PerPSU

System,twoPSUs

PerPSU

System,twoPSUs


500 430 220 440 420 220 440 409 226 452

1 TB 439 219 438 429 212 424 409 226 452

2 TB 469 229 458 470 228 456 n/a


500 1467 751 1501 1433 751 1501 1395 771 1542

1 TB 1496 747 1493 1462 724 1447 1395 771 1542

2 TB 1599 781 1561 1602 777 1554 n/a

Notes:

1. Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU, high fan speed, andpower distributed over one power cord.

2. Per PSU indicates typical power needs, per PSU, for a system operating undernormal conditions.

3. System indicates typical power needs for two PSUs in a system operating undernormal conditions and power distributed over two power cords.

Note: Depending on the disk drive type, your EXN3000 might have two or fourpower supplies. EXN3000s with SATA disk drives have two powersupplies and require the use of two power outlets.

Important factors to considerWhen installing the N series storage system, you must keep in mind certainenvironmental factors. When you are planning your installation give carefulconsideration to the following:

v Weight of the N series storage system. See “Hardware specifications” on page118. The N series storage system requires three people to install it.

v Rack considerations. The clearances and mounting requirements are specified in“Rack considerations” on page 157.

v Power supplies and power requirements. You may need to provide new serviceor install an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). See “Power supplies and powerrequirements” on page 157 for more information.

v System input power. See “System input power” on page 159 for moreinformation.

v Thermal considerations. See “Thermal considerations” on page 159.

v Floor loading. See “Floor-loading specifications” on page 160.

v Floor planning. See “Floor plan considerations” on page 160 for moreinformation.

v Cabling. Both Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling will be required. SeeChapter 4, “Site planning,” on page 111 and Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” on page163.

v AutoSupport. AutoSupport is a sophisticated, event-driven logging agent featuredin the Data ONTAP operating software and inside each N series storage systemsthat continuously monitors the health of your system. See Chapter 6,“AutoSupport,” on page 167.


Rack considerationsThe four recommended racks for the N series storage system are:

v IBM 7014 Model T00 (a 36U high rack)

v IBM 7014 Model T42 (a 42U high rack)

v IBM 2101 Model N00 (a 36U high rack)

v IBM 2101 Model N42 (a 42U high rack)

The N series storage system can also be mounted in some other IBM and non-IBMracks, provided the rack meets all the requirements specified in Appendix C,“Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 175.

When clustering N series storage systems, the physical proximity of the clusternodes is determined by the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables that areordered. Feature codes are available for cluster cables ranging in size from 2 m to30 m. For more information, see Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” onpage 9.

Power supplies and power requirementsN series storage systems contain two hot-swappable power supplies. They are bothactive at the same time, but have sufficient capacity that if one fails the other canassume the full load. Each power supply has a separate power cord. Separatepower sources for each power cord are recommended.

Power cords with attached plugs are provided for most ac-powered systems. Thepower cords are ordered by feature code and at least one power cord must bespecified when the ordering the N series storage system. A feature code containstwo cords, one for each power supply. Power cables vary by country and are listedin Appendix B, “Power cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 171.

Specific voltage information for NAS storage systems and storage expansion unitsis provided in the following tables:

v N3300 storage systems:

– Table 72 on page 121

















v N5000 series storage systems:

























v EXN1000 storage expansion units:



v EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units:





v EXN3000 storage expansion units:



Important:

1. Before you install the N series storage system, you must make sure that itsproposed location meets the power requirements. If necessary, consult anelectrician to determine if your electrical infrastructure can support the N seriesstorage system that you are installing.

2. Consider security when planning your power requirements. (For example, yourpower mains should be in a secure area.) See “Security” on page 161 for moreinformation.


System input powerThe following input power considerations apply to all system units. See “Rackconsiderations” on page 157 for additional information about power.

Electrical considerationsThese topics should be considered before you install a system.

Primary computer power serviceAlthough a dedicated power supply is not necessary, for maximum reliability, thecomputer power panel should connect to feeders that do not serve other loads.Connect electrical noise-producing devices to panels separate from those feedingthe system units.

GroundingFor information about grounding your N series storage systems and storageexpansion units, refer to the Installation and Setup Instructions for your N seriesproducts.

To ensure proper grounding, a licensed electrician should check the grounding andreceptacles for conformance with the country electrical codes.

Computer room emergency power-off controlsAs a safety precaution, you should provide computer room emergency power-offcontrols for disconnecting the main service wiring that supplies the computerequipment. Install these controls at a convenient place for the operator and next tothe main exit doors of the room.

Lightning protectionYou should install lightning protection devices when in environments such as these:

v An overhead power service supplies the primary power.

v The area is subject to electrical storms or equivalent-type power surges.

Three-phase powerIf your rack power distribution uses three-phase power, consult a licensedelectrician to ensure that the loads are properly balanced.

Thermal considerationsWhen installed in a rack, all components, including the N series storage system,should have front-to-back air flow. Failure to do so results in a thermal loop, wherethe heated exhaust air from one unit is drawn into the air intake of another, whichfurther heats the air. Eventually a unit will shut down or fail to operate due to hightemperature.


Floor-loading specificationsConsult with an engineer to determine your floor-loading specifications. See“Hardware specifications” on page 118 for information on the N series storagesystem weight. See Appendix C, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” onpage 175 for rack floor-loading specifications.

Floor plan considerationsYou need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storage system. Thissection describes floor planning considerations and how to create a floor plan. Italso describes what security measures to keep in mind when doing floor planning.

Before you create your floor plan, consider these variables:

v Flow of work and personnel within the area

v Placement to optimize cooling, such as positioning the unit over a cutout in araised floor

v Routing of cables and length of cables

v Location of safety equipment

v Future expansion

Creating a floor planIt is important to ensure that the total weight of installed racks and equipment doesnot exceed the maximum amount of weight that the floor in your facility supports.

Cold aisleA

irco

nditi

oner

Hot aisle

back

front

back

back

front

Airflow

front2440 mm betweencenter lines of hotand cold aisle

Perforated tilesor gratings

1220 mm coldaisle width

Racks Nsip

g0

01

Racks

Racks

Airflow

Airflow

Figure 13. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration


You need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storage system. Thissection discusses floor planning considerations and how to create a floor plan. Italso discusses security measures to keep in mind when doing your floor planning.

Note: You might need to prepare and analyze several plans before choosing a finalone. If you install more than one N series storage system in more than oneinstallation stage, prepare a separate plan for each installation stage.

Begin with an accurate drawing of the installation area (blueprints and floor plansare appropriate). Include the following items in your floor plan:

v Service and operational clearances.

v If the N series storage system will be on a raised floor, consider any objects thatmight obstruct cable routing and the height of the raised floor.

v If the N series storage system will not be on a raised floor, consider thesefactors:

– Placement of cables to minimize obstruction

– Amount of additional cable required if the cable is indirectly routed between Nseries storage system (for example, along the walls or suspended from theceiling)

v Location of:

– Power receptacles

– Air conditioning equipment and controls

– File cabinets, desks, and other office equipment

– Room emergency power-off controls

– All entrances, walkways, exits, windows, columns, and pillars

v LAN and telephone connections.

When you finish the floor plan, review it to make sure that all cables to beconnected to the N series storage system are long enough. Also ensure that the Nseries storage system has enough clearance.

SecurityIn forming your floor plan, you should consider ways to keep your N series storagesystem secure. For security purposes, use these precautions:

v Choose a trusted administrator.

v Place any equipment that may disrupt operations (for example, power supplies)in a secure location.

v Keep rack cabinet keys in a secure location.


Chapter 5. Cable planning

Before ordering, the customer is asked to develop specific planning informationconcerning the physical layout of the installation. This chapter can help you planyour layout by presenting useful planning information for interconnecting the systemunits and devices.

You must plan the type of cable, cable path, and cable length. Consider not onlyyour current needs but also your anticipated growth and the relocation of personnel.

To assist with the installation of your system, you should note cable paths on yourfloor plan.

The customer is responsible for planning for the installation of interconnectingcables, including the proper lightning and surge protection as necessary and shouldcontact the appropriate contractor for guidance and assistance as required.

General considerationsIn preparing for cabling, consider the following:

v Where applicable, electrical and physical specifications of cables that youcurrently have and plan to use with the N series storage system must becompatible with the standards mentioned in this manual. If no standard isspecifically mentioned in this manual, the standards for the interface on thatadapter must be met.

v Lengths and paths of cables.

v Communication signal cables should be installed away from power lines or othersources of electrical interference.

v Labeling of cables and ports you currently have in order to indicate whichdevices you want attached to them.

v Electrostatic discharge (ESD) considerations. In particular, unprotected patchpanels, punch blocks, or other intermediate routing or switching devices used incabling can allow ESD into the network.

Note: Lightning protection must be provided on any cable that travels outside ofthe building in which the system or devices are installed. Contact a cablingvendor about providing lightning protection for those cables. Fiber-opticcables do not require lightning protection.

The following cabling is required:

1. Power cables for power supplies and rack power distribution.

2. Category 5 or better copper Ethernet cables with RJ-45 connectors.

Note: EXN3000 ACP cabling requires Category 6 or better Ethernet cables withRJ-45 connectors.

3. 50 or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fiber Ethernet ports.

4. 50 or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fibre Channel ports.

5. LVD SCSI cable for optional direct SCSI-attached tape backup. The connectoron the rear of the N series storage system is a VHDCI mini 68–pin connector.

6. If clustering, Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables are available for N5000series and N7000 series models and can be ordered in the following lengthsand types:


Table 147. Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables


2m Copper Cluster4X IB cable

2864, 2865 , 2866,2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21 1037

5m Fiber Cluster 4XIB cable

2864, 2865, 2866,2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21 1040

30m Fiber Cluster 4XIB cable

2864, 2865, 2866,2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21 1041

Copper-FiberConverter

2864, 2865, 2866,2867, 2868, 2869

A20/G20/A21 1042

Cable measuringAccurate measuring of cables is critical to a successful and efficient installation. Donot guess or estimate your cable lengths.

Some cable lengths are fixed. For example, the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnectcables are fixed length cables that restrict the physical distance of the cluster nodesin the rack. The power cords, depending on the feature code, are also of fixedlengths.

For the Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling, consider the following:

1. Cabling that exits the N series storage system is typically run in a cablemanagement tray, included with the N series storage system.

2. Avoid sharp bends and do not route cables near rack doors to avoid crimpingcables.

3. Account for raised floor height, if appropriate.

Cable labelingCable labels can be used to organize your cabling. The fields on a cable label are:

Room The room number, or other information about thephysical location of the device.

Person The name of the person who uses the device.

Telephone # The nearest telephone number to the device.

Device type This could be a printer, plotter, TTY, or similardevice.

Device ID The device ID is determined when the software isconfigured on the system.

Software location code The software location code is the link between thehardware and software. This code appears in thesoftware configuration menus and in the hardwarediagnostic menus.

Note: For specific location code information, referto the Diagnostic Information manual for yoursystem.

Adapter type The adapter type number is located on a labelattached to the end of the adapter.


Note: Some of the adapters do not have anadapter type.

Interface Name of the asynchronous adapters, and somenetwork adapters, generally includes the name ofthe interface. For example, Ethernet LAN or FibreChannel SAN.

EIA Used in a rack-type system unit to identify thephysical location of the drawer within the rack. Thelabel along the right side of the rack (with rearcover open) indicates numbers from 1, at thebottom, to 32, at the top of the rack. The number atthe bottom-right corner of the drawer is the EIAlocation for this drawer.

Slot Physical position within the system unit or drawerwhere the adapter is located. Each adapter slot isidentified by a single digit number. Usually, thenumber is embossed in the adapter mountingframe.

Connector Connector number on the adapter. Most adaptershave only one connector, so this number is 1.

Tailgate The number of the tailgate connector to which thiscable is attached if tailgates are used.

System ID If an installation has more than one system unit,each one must be identified to prevent connectingdevices to the wrong system unit. The customerdetermines the System ID.

Chapter 5. Cable planning 165

Chapter 6. AutoSupport

AutoSupport is a sophisticated, event-driven logging agent featured in the DataONTAP operating software and inside each N series storage systems thatcontinuously monitors the health of your system. It keeps a watchful eye on amultitude of preset conditions, automatically sending a status message to IBMTechnical Support, and your system administrator if desired, for immediate action tocorrect potential problems. AutoSupport makes sure that your storage environmentis working at top efficiency.

How does AutoSupport work?The AutoSupport feature triggers the automatic sending of notification messages toIBM Service and Support. AutoSupport also has the ability to send notificationmessages to one or more customer-specified e-mail addresses which can alertrecipients to potential problems with the N series storage system. As necessary,IBM Service and Support will contact customers based on the contact information inthe customer’s record for resolution of potential system problems.

Note: After an occurrence of an event, an AutoSupport notification is sent to IBMService and Support via HTTPS by a direct connection to the predefinedlocation specified in Data ONTAP.

AutoSupport is enabled by default with Data ONTAP 7.1.1 or later when youconfigure your N series storage system for the first time.

IBM strongly encourages customers to enable AutoSupport. AutoSupport enablesthe IBM System Storage N series machines to send diagnostic information back toIBM when error conditions are encountered within the machines. AutoSupport canbe enabled via the command line interface via the following command:

options autosupport.enable on

AutoSupport can also be enabled via the FilerView web browser user interface byselecting Filer � Configure AutoSupport in the left-hand navigation frame, andthen selecting Yes from the drop-down list box next to “AutoSupport Enabled.”

On later versions of Data ONTAP, AutoSupport is enabled by default when youconfigure your N series storage system for the first time. After a grace period of 24hours, AutoSupport messages start being generated.

Note: You can disable AutoSupport at any time using the autosupport.enableoption, but you are strongly advised to leave it enabled.

Interaction with mail hostsN series storage systems do not function as mail hosts, they rely on another host atthe customer site that listens on the SMTP port (25) to send mail to thecustomer-specified e-mail addresses. AutoSupport requires at least one hostreachable by an N series storage system that runs an SMTP server or a mailforwarder, such as the sendmail program.

Subject line of AutoSupport e-mail messagesThe subject line of the e-mail messages sent by the AutoSupport mechanismcontains a text string that identifies the reason for the notification. The subject also


contains a relative prioritization of the message, using syslog severity levels fromDEBUG to EMERGENCY. The messages and other information in the notificationshould be used to check on the problem being reported.

The format of the subject line is as follows:

System Notification from (message)

Short e-mail messages for urgent eventsCustomers can specify up to five addresses of e-mail recipients in which the Nseries storage systems can send a short alert notification containing only the reasonfor the alert to these recipients. The short e-mail messages contain the reason forthe notification in the subject line and note the time of failure. These messages aretriggered only by specific urgent events. This feature is useful for systemadministrators who read e-mail messages on alphanumeric pagers.

Recipients of AutoSupport e-mail messagesCustomers can specify up to five e-mail recipient addresses for standardAutoSupport notification.

Technical Support responseWhen IBM Technical Support receives an alert AutoSupport notification, it takescorrective action to resolve the problems. IBM Technical Support initiates a caseand then contacts the customer to further investigate the situation or to provide acorrective action to the customer.

Cluster considerationsThe AutoSupport notification messages from a N series storage system in a clusterare different from the AutoSupport notification messages from a standalone N seriesstorage system in the following ways:

v The subject line in the AutoSupport messages from a filer in a cluster reads“Cluster notification” instead of “System notification.”

v The AutoSupport messages from a N series storage system in a cluster containinformation about the N series storage system's partner, such as the partnersystem ID and the partner host name.

v In takeover mode, if you reboot the live N series storage system, twoAutoSupport messages are sent to notify the e-mail recipients of the reboot. Thelive N series storage system sends one message; the failed N series storagesystem sends the other message.

v The live N series storage system sends an AutoSupport message after itcompletes the takeover process.


Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes

This appendix discusses how to determine the power line lengths running from yourN series storage system to the power source.

Recommended AC power line sizesLonger AC power feeds need to be properly designed to preserve voltage levels tothe equipment. The wiring from the breaker panel to the power strip, which suppliespower to your N series storage system and storage expansion units, can oftenexceed 50 feet.

Note: Total AC wire length = breaker to wall or ceiling outlet + extension cable orceiling drop.

The following tables list the recommended conductor size for 2% voltage drop for aparticular distance in feet (taken from the Radio Engineer's Handbook).

Table 148. 110V, single phase recommended conductor sizes

110V,single-phase 20A circuit 30A circuit 40A circuit 50A circuit

25 feet 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 8 AWG



Table 149. 220V, single phase recommended conductor sizes

220V,single-phase 20A circuit 30A circuit 40A circuit 50A circuit




The following table lists the approximate equivalent wire gauge (American WireGauge (AWG) to Harmonized Cordage).

Table 150. American Wire Gage to Harmonized Cordage equivalents

AWG 8 10 12

Harmonized, mm-mm 1 4.0 2.5 1.5

1 mm-mm = millimeter squared


Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems

This appendix contains information about FRU/CRUs and power cords for N seriesproducts.

FRU/CRU list for N series productsFor the most current FRU/CRU list for your N series product, see the following website:


Power cord list for N series productsThe following list details the power cord feature codes (FCs) for N series products.

FC 9000 (All countries)Power cord, Rack PDU

v 27 inches

v Rated 250 V/15 A

v Product end uses C14; PDU end uses C13.

FC 9001 Europe and othersProvides power cords for Austria, Belgium, Bolivia, Bulgaria, Chile, Croatia,Czech Republic, Egypt, Estonia, European Union, Finland, France,Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Latvia, Lebanon, Lithuania,Luxemburg, Morocco, Netherlands, Norway, Peru, Poland, Portugal,Romania, Russia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Suriname, Sweden, Turkey

v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

v Attached plug EL 211 (CEE 7-VII) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9002 United Kingdom and othersProvides power cords for United Kingdom, Costa Rica, Cyprus, Guyana,Hong Kong, Ireland, Kuwait, Malta, Oman, Singapore, Sri Lanka


v Attached plug EL 210 (13A fuse) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9003 JapanProvides power cords for Japan


v Attached plug EL 302 (JIS C3306) designed for 100-110 V ac input.

FC 9004 U.S., Six Feet (2 m)Provides power cords for U.S., Canada, Mexico, Belize, Columbia, Ecuador,El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, Korea, Nicaragua, Panama, Philippines,Puerto Rico, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Venezuela


v Attached plug EL 302 (Nema 5-15P) designed for 100-120 V ac input.

FC 9005 Australia, New ZealandProvides power cords for Australia, New Zealand, Uruguay


v Attached plug EL 206 (AS 3112) designed for 200-240 V ac input.



FC 9006 Switzerland, LiechtensteinProvides power cords for Switzerland, Liechtenstein


v Attached plug EL 203 (SEV 1011) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9007 ArgentinaProvides power cords for Argentina


v Attached plug EL 219 (IRAM 2073) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9008 ChinaProvides power cords for China


v Attached plug EL 602 (GB 2099/GB 1002) designed for 200-240 V acinput.

FC 9009 DenmarkProvides power cords for Denmark


v Attached plug EL 213 (DHCR 107-2-D1) designed for 200-240 V acinput.

FC 9010 India, Pakistan, South AfricaProvides power cords for India, Macau, Pakistan, South Africa


v Attached plug EL 208 (BS 164-1, BS 546) designed for 200-240 V acinput.

FC 9011 IsraelProvides power cords for Israel


v Attached plug EL 212 (SI 32) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9012 ItalyProvides power cords for Italy


v Attached plug EL 502 (CEI 23-16) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9013 North America (250 V)Provides power cords for U.S.


v Attached plug EL 309 (NEMA 6-15P) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

FC 9014 BrazilProvides power cords for Brazil


v Attached plug EL 211 (NBR 6147/2000) designed for 200-240 V ac input

FC 9015 TaiwanProvides 125 V power cords for Taiwan


v Attached plug EL 302 (CNS 10917-3) designed for 100-120 V ac input.

FC 9016 Taiwan (250 V)Provides 250 V power cords for Taiwan



v Attached plug EL 610 (CNS 10917, CNS 690) designed for 250 V acinput.

Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems 173

Appendix C. Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks

This chapter provides requirements and specifications for 19" racks used by the Nseries storage system.

2101 Model N00 rack specificationsTable 151. IBM 2101 Model N00 rack specifications

DimensionsHeight 1804 mm 71.0 in.Capacity 36 EIA UnitsWidth without sidepanels

623 mm 24.5 in.

With side panels 650 mm 25.6 in.Depth with front and reardoor installed

1100 mm 43.3 in.

WeightBase rack 244 kg 535 lbsFull rack¹ 816 kg 1795 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page 180.

Electrical² (sum specified values for drawers or enclosures in rack)AC rackPower source loadingmaximum in kVA (perPDU)3

4.8

Voltage range (V ac) 200 to 240Frequency (hertz) 50 or 60

Temperaturerequirements

(see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Humidity requirements (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Noise emissions (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Clearances Front Back Left Right

Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 on page177). Refer to the individual drawer specifications.

Service 915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) 0 mm (0 in.) 0 mm (0 in.)

1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to amaximum weight of 35 lbs/EIA (Unit).

2. The total rack power should be derived from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack.

3. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawersmounted in the rack. The power limitations of the PDU single-phase power cord limit the number of drawers that can be pluggedinto a pair of PDUs. Each PDU single-phase power cord is limited to 24 amps.

4. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer heat output andprovide the airflow volumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.


2101 Model N42 rack specificationsTable 152. IBM 2101 Model N42 rack specifications

DimensionsHeight 2105 mm 79.3 in.Capacity 42 EIA UnitsWidth without sidepanels

623 mm 24.5 in.

With side panels 650 mm 25.6 in.Depth with front and reardoor installed

1100 mm 43.3 in.

WeightBase rack 216 kg 475 lbs (without PDUs and with standard doors and two side panels)Full rack¹ 930 kg 2045 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page 180.

Electrical² (sum specified values for drawers or enclosures in rack)AC rackPower source loadingmaximum in kVA (perPDU)3

4.8







Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 on page177). Refer to the individual drawer specifications.

Service 915 mm (36 in.) 915 mm (36 in.) 0 mm (0 in.) 0 mm (0 in.)



3. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawersmounted in the rack. The power limitations of the PDU single-phase power cord limit the number of drawers that can be pluggedinto a pair of PDUs. Each PDU single-phase power cord is limited to 24 amps.


5. For information about the Rear Door Heat eXchanger (FC 6858), see the IBM Rear Door Heat eXchanger Planning Guide onwww.ibm.com/pc/support, or see the IBM Power Systems Site Preparation and Physical Planning Guide, SA76-0103, or the IBMStorage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Service Guide: Model N42, GC53-1174.


http://www.ibm.com/pc/support

7014 Rack specifications

Model T00 rackTable 153. IBM 7014 Model T00 rack specifications

DimensionsHeight 1804 mm 71.0 in.Capacity 36 EIA UnitsWith PDP - DC only 1926 mm 75.8 in.Width without sidepanels

623 mm 24.5 in.

With side panels 644 mm 25.4 in.Depth with rear dooronly

1042 mm 41.0 in.

Depth with rear door andRS/6000® style frontdoor

1098 mm 43.3 in.

System p (sculptured)style front door

1147 mm 45.2 in.

WeightBase rack 244 kg 535 lbsFull rack¹ 816 kg 1795 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page 180.

Electrical² (sum specified values fordrawers or enclosures in rack)

DC rackPower source loadingmaximum in kVA³

8.4

Voltage range (V dc) -40 to -60AC rackPower source loadingmaximum in kVA (perPDU)⁴

4.8







Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5). Referto the individual drawer specifications.

Service 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.)



3. The Power Distribution Panel (PDP) on the DC-powered rack can hold up to eighteen (nine per power source) 48 volt 20 to 50amp circuit breakers (configuration dependent). Each power source supports up to 8.4 kVA.Note: Because the N series storage system is an ac-only power unit, it is not recommended that the N series storage systembe installed in a dc-only rack.

4. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawersmounted in the rack.


Appendix C. Rack Specifications 177

Model T42 RackTable 154. IBM 7014 Model T42 rack specifications

DimensionsHeight 2015 mm 79.3 in.Capacity 42 EIA UnitsWith PDP - DC only Not applicableWidth without side panels 623 mm 24.5 in.With side panels 644 mm 25.4 in.Depth with rear door only 1042 mm 41.0 in.Depth with rear door and RS/6000 stylefront door

1098 mm 43.3 in.

System p (sculptured) style front door 1147 mm 45.2 in.

WeightBase rack 261 kg 575 lbsFull rack¹ 930 kg 2045 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page

180.

Service clearance Recommended minimum vertical service clearance from floor is 2439 mm or 8 feet.

All other specifications For all other technical information, see “Model T00 rack” on page 177.

T00 and T42 service clearances and caster locationThe service clearances and caster locations are shown in Figure 14 on page 179:


Note: Rack units are large and heavy and are not easily moved. Becausemaintenance activities require access at both the front and back, extra roomneeds to be allowed. The footprint shows the radius of the swinging doors onthe I/O rack. The Figure 15 shows the minimum space required.

T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments

2474 mm (97.4 in.)

2921 mm(115 in.)915 mm

(36 in.)915 mm(36 in.)

915 mm (36 in.)

915 mm (36 in.)

Front

CasterLocation

Front coverthickness58 mm (2.4 in.)

Rear coverthickness20 mm (0.8 in.)

Side coverthickness 2x10 mm (0.4 in.)

(4.8)121

(3.1)

80

Cable opening310 mm (12.2 in.)x 50 mm (2 in.)

Figure 14. Service clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks.

Separation25.4 mm(1 in.)

T00or

T42Rack

T00or

T42Rack

Figure 15. Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments


T00 racks and T42 racks can be bolted together in a multiple rack arrangement asshown above. A kit is available including the bolts, spacers, and decorative trimpieces to cover the 25.4 mm (1 in.) space. For service clearances, see the serviceclearances as shown in the table for the “Model T00 rack” on page 177.

T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loadingThe T00 and T42 racks can be extremely heavy when several drawers are present.Table 155 shows the necessary weight distribution distances for the T00 and T42racks when it is loaded.

Table 155. T00 and T42 rack weight distribution

Rack Systemweight (1)lbs (kg)

Width (2)in. (mm)

Depth (2)in. (mm)

Weight distribution distance (3)

Front & backin. (mm)

Left & rightin. (mm)

7014-T00(4)

1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8(477.5)

18.4 (467.4)

7014-T00(5)

1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8(477.5)

0.0 (0.0)

7014-T00(6)

1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8(477.5)

22 (559)

7014-T42(4)

2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8(477.5)

18.4 (467.4)

7014-T42(5)

2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8(477.5)

0.0 (0.0)

7014-T42(6)

2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8(477.5)

27 (686)

The following table shows the necessary floor-loading specifications for the T00 andT42 racks when it is loaded.

Table 156. T00 and T42 rack floor-loading specifications

Rack Floor loading

Raised kg/m2 Non-raised kg/m2 Raised lbs/ft2 Non-raised lbs/ft2

7014-T00 (4) 366.7 322.7 75 66

7014-T00 (5) 734.5 690.6 150.4 141.4

7014-T00 (6) 341 297 70 61

7014-T42 (4) 403 359 82.5 73.5

7014-T42 (5) 825 781 169 160

7014-T42 (6) 341.4 297.5 70 61

The following notes are for both of the preceding tables.

Notes:

1. For maximum weight of fully populated rack, units are lbs with kg inparentheses.

2. For dimensions without covers, units are inches with mm in parentheses.

3. The weight distribution distance in all four directions is the area around the rackperimeter (minus covers) necessary to distribute the weight beyond theperimeter of the rack. Weight distribution areas cannot overlap with adjacentcomputer equipment weight distribution areas. Units are inches with mm inparentheses.


4. Weight distribution distance is 1/2 the service clearance values shown in thefigure plus cover thickness.

5. No left and right weight distribution distance.

6. Left and right weight distribution distance required for a 70 lbs/ft2 raised floorloading objective.

Rack specificationsAll racks used for N series storage system installation must conform to thespecifications in this section. Both the IBM 7014 (Model T00 and Model T42) andthe IBM 2101 Model N00 racks conform, but some other racks, including a few fromIBM do not.

v The rack or cabinet must meet the EIA Standard EIA-310-D for 19-inch racks.

The front rack opening must be 451 mm wide + 0.75 mm (17.75 in. + 0.03 in.),and the rail-mounting holes must be 465 mm + 0.8 mm (18.3 in. + 0.03 in.) aparton center (horizontal width between vertical columns of holes on the twofront-mounting flanges and on the two rear-mounting flanges). Rail-mountingholes must be 7.1 mm + 0.1 mm (0.28 in. + 0.004 in.) in diameter.

Rear, No Door

Front, No Door

571mm (22.50 in.)

203mm (8.0 in.)

719mm (28.31 in.)

51mm (2.01 in.)

451mm (17.76 in.)

494mm (19.45 in.)

Drawer Rail

Mounting Flanges494mm (19.45 in.)

Figure 16. Top view of non-IBM rack specifications dimensions


The vertical distance between mounting holes must consist of sets of 3 holesspaced (from bottom to top) 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), and 12.67mm (0.5 in.) on center (making each 3-hole set of vertical hole spacing 44.45mm (1.75 in.) apart on center).

Figure 17. Rack specifications dimensions, top front view


v The rack or cabinet must be capable of supporting an average load of 15.9 kg(35 lbs) of product weight per EIA unit.

For example, a 4-EIA drawer will have a maximum drawer weight of 63.6 kg (140lbs).

v Only ac power drawers are supported in the rack or cabinet. It is stronglyrecommended that you use a power distribution unit (PDU) that meets the samespecifications as IBM PDUs to supply rack power. Each Power Distribution Businstalled in a rack requires a dedicated power line of 200 to 240 V ac and 30 A.Rack or cabinet power distribution devices must meet the drawer powerrequirements, as well as that of any additional products that will be connected tothe same power distribution device.

The rack or cabinet power receptacle (PDU, UPS or multi-outlet strip) must havea compatible plug type for your drawer or device.

Note: Refer to the sales manual for 7014 or 2101 racks if you want to use PDUsthat are designed for 7014 or 2101 racks. The customer is responsible forensuring that the PDU is compatible with the rack or cabinet and assumesresponsibility for any and all agency certifications required.

v The rack or cabinet must be compatible with drawer mounting rails, including asecure and snug fit of the rail-mounting pins and screws into the rack or cabinetrail support hole.

Note: If the rack or cabinet has square holes, a plug-in hole adapter may berequired. The plug-in hole adapters are NOT part of the N series railmounting kit included with every N series machine.

The rails provided with the N series storage system have been designed andtested to safely support the weight of your drawer or device. The rails alsoprovide rear tie-down brackets.

6.75mm min

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

450 +/- 0.75mm

Rack Front Opening

465 +/- 0.8mm

Rack Mounting Holes Center-to-CenterHole Diameter =

7.1 +/- 0.1mm

6.75mm min

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

15.9mm

15.9mm

12.7mm

Bottom Front of Rack

EIA

Ho

leSp

ac

ing

Figure 18. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view


The front and rear mounting flanges in the rack or cabinet must be 719 mm (28.3in.) apart and the internal width bounded by the mounting flanges at least 494mm (19.45 in.), for the IBM rails to fit in your rack or cabinet (see figure, TopView of non-IBM Rack Specifications Dimensions on page Figure 16 on page181).

v The rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed both in thefront and rear of the rack, or have another means of preventing the rack orcabinet from tipping while the drawer or device is installed or removed.

Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet may be securelybolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long andheavy row of racks or cabinets. Refer to the Rack Installation Guide for the 7014or 2101 and the individual drawer installation guides for additional information.

v There must be adequate front and rear service clearances (in and around therack or cabinet).

The rack or cabinet must have sufficient horizontal width clearance in the frontand rear to allow the drawer to be fully slid into the front and, if applicable, therear service access positions (typically this requires 914.4 mm (36 in.) clearancein both the front and rear).

If present, front and rear doors must be able to open far enough to provideunrestrained access for service or be easily removable. If doors must beremoved for service, it is the customer's responsibility to remove them prior toservice.

v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate clearance around the rack drawer.

There must be adequate clearance around the drawer bezel so that it can beopened and closed, according to the product specifications (refer to the 7014 or2101 Rack Installation Guides and the individual drawer installation guides).

Front or rear doors must also maintain a minimum of 51 mm (2 in.) front, 203mm (8 in.) rear, door-to-mounting flange clearance, and 494 mm (19.4 in.) front,571 mm (22.5 in.) rear, side-to-side clearance for drawer bezels and cables (seeFigure 16 on page 181).

v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate front-to-back ventilation.

For optimum ventilation, it is recommended the rack or cabinet not have a frontdoor. If the rack or cabinet has doors, the doors must be fully perforated so thatthere is proper front-to-back airflow to maintain the required drawer ambient inlettemperature between 10 °C and 40 °C (50 °F and 104 °F), with an ideal 22 °C(72 °F), inside the rack. The perforations must yield 34% minimum open area persquare inch.

General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBMrack

v Any product or component that plugs into either an IBM Power Distribution Unit(PDU) or main power (using a power cord), or uses any voltage over 42 V acmust be Safety Certified by a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) forthe country in which it will be installed.

Some of the items that require safety certification may include: the rack orcabinet (if it contains electrical components integral to the rack or cabinet), fantrays, PDU, uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), multi-outlet strips, or any otherproducts installed in the rack or cabinet that connect to hazardous voltage.

Examples of OSHA-approved NRTLs for the USA:

– UL

– ETL


– CSA (with CSA NRTL or CSA US mark)

Examples of approved NRTLs for Canada:

– UL (Ulc mark)

– ETL (ETLc mark)

– CSA

The European Union requires a CE mark and a Manufacturer's Declaration ofConformity (DOC).

Certified products should have the NRTL logos or marks somewhere on theproduct or product label. However, proof of certification must be made availableto IBM upon request. Proof consists of such items as copies of the NRTL licenseor certificate, a CB Certificate, a Letter of Authorization to apply the NRTL mark,the first few pages of the NRTL certification report, Listing in an NRTLpublication, or a copy of the UL Yellow Card. Proof should contain themanufacturer's name, product type and model, standard to which it was certified,the NRTL name or logo, the NRTL file number or license number, and a list ofany Conditions of Acceptance or Deviations. A Manufacturer's Declaration is notproof of certification by an NRTL.

v The rack or cabinet must meet all electrical and mechanical safety legalrequirements for the country in which it is installed.

The rack or cabinet must be free of exposed hazards (such as voltages over 60V dc or 42 V ac, energy over 240 VA, sharp edges, mechanical pinch points, orhot surfaces).

v There must be an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device for eachproduct in the rack, including any PDU.

A disconnect device may consist of either the plug on the power cord (if thepower cord is no longer than 6 feet), the inlet receptacle (if the power cord is of adetachable type), or a power on/off switch, or an Emergency Power Off switch onthe rack, provided all power is removed from the rack or product by thedisconnect device.

If the rack or cabinet has electrical components (such as fan trays or lights), therack must have an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device.

v The rack or cabinet, PDU and Multi-Outlet Strips, and products installed in therack or cabinet must all be properly grounded to the customer facility ground.

There must be no more than 0.1 Ohms between the ground pin of the PDU orrack plug and any touchable metal or conductive surface on the rack and on theproducts installed in the rack. Grounding method must comply with applicablecountry's electric code (such as NEC or CEC). Ground continuity can be verifiedby your IBM service personnel, after the installation is completed, and should beverified prior to the first service activity.

v The voltage rating of the PDU and multi-outlet strips must be compatible with theproducts plugged into them.

The current and power ratings for the PDU or multi-outlet strips must be at least1.25 times the sum of the ratings of the products that will plug into it. The currentrating of the PDU or multi-outlet strip must be less than 0.80 of the rating for thebuilding supply circuit (as required by the NEC and CEC). Example: A PDU ratingof 12A for a 15A wall breaker, and sum of product ratings does not exceed 9.6A.

If a UPS is installed, it must meet all the above electrical safety requirements asdescribed for a PDU (including certification by an NRTL).

v The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack orcabinet must be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, and inaccordance with all national, state or province, and local codes and laws.


The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack orcabinet must be used as intended by the manufacturer (per manufacturer'sproduct documentation and marketing literature).

v All documentation for use and installation of the rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, andall products in the rack or cabinet, including safety information, must be availableon-site.

v If there is more than one source of power in the rack or cabinet, there must beclearly visible safety labels for "Multiple Power Source" (in the languagesrequired for the country in which the product is installed).

v If the rack or cabinet or any products installed in the cabinet had safety or weightlabels applied by the manufacturer, they must be intact and translated into thelanguages required for the country in which the product is installed.

v If the rack or cabinet has doors, the rack becomes a fire enclosure by definitionand must meet the applicable flammability ratings (V-0 or better). Totally metalenclosures at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) thick are considered to comply.

Nonenclosure (decorative) materials must have a flammability rating of V-1 orbetter. If glass is used (such as in rack doors) it must be safety glass. If woodshelves are used in the rack or cabinet, they must be treated with a UL Listedflame-retardant coating.

v The rack or cabinet configuration must comply with all IBM requirements for "safeto service" (contact your IBM Installation Planning Representative if in doubt).

There must be no unique maintenance procedures or tools required for service.

Elevated service installations, where the products to be serviced are installedbetween 1.5 m and 3.7 m (5 ft and 12 ft) above the floor, require the availabilityof an OSHA- and CSA-approved nonconductive step ladder. If a ladder isrequired for service, the customer must supply the OSHA- and CSA-approvednonconductive step ladder (unless other arrangements have been made with thelocal IBM Service Branch Office). Products installed over 2.9 m (12 ft) above thefloor require a Special Bid to be completed before they can be serviced by IBMservice personnel.

For products not intended for rack-mounting to be serviced by IBM, the productsand parts that will be replaced as part of that service must not weigh over 11.4kg (25 lbs) (contact your Installation Planning Representative if in doubt).

There must not be any special education or training required for safe servicing ofany of the products installed in the racks (contact your Installation PlanningRepresentative if in doubt).

v Any rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed, or haveanother means of preventing the rack or cabinet from tipping during productoperation or service.

Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet may be securelybolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long andheavy row of racks or cabinets.

v It is strongly recommended that the mounting rails that are shipped with theproduct be used to install it in the rack.

The mounting rails that ship with IBM products have been designed and tested tosafely support the product during operation and service activities. The mountingrails used on products to be serviced by IBM must be certified for use with theproducts by an NRTL to all applicable country safety standards.

Note: IBM requires that mounting rails must be able to support four times themaximum rated product weight in its worst-case position (fully extendedfront and rear positions) for one full minute without catastrophic failure.


Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in the N3600.

Note: The N3300 does not support optional adapter cards.

Table 157. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600

Feature Code Feature Code Description

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical)

1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)

1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment

1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment

1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical)

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper)

1026 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper)

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment

1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe)

1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA

1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA

1060 Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter

1062 Single-port 10-Gbps NIC

1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (optical)

1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target adapter (copper)

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed one.For the dual-node models the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed two.

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer tothe IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. Thisadapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275musing 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adaptersupports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. Thisadapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100musing Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.



Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapterauto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attachingsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000).The FC ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-styleconnectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.

Table 158. Dual-port 4 Gbps FC HBA for disk - maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre62.5 micron multi-modefibre

1 Gbps 500m 300m

2 Gbps 300m 150m

4 Gbps 150m 70m


Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adaptersupports the following maximum cable lengths.

Table 159. Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape - maximum cable lengths


1 Gbps 500m 300m

2 Gbps 300m 150m

4 Gbps 150m 70m


This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021)Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE)adapter that provides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iSCSIhosts.



Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023)Feature code 1023 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adaptersupports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standard. It has fourRJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target PCIe adapter that providestwo Ethernet iSCSI ports to be configured as target connections for iSCSI hosts.


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment(FC 1029)

Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported Nseries disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000) and tapedevices to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical portswith LC connectors support the following cable lengths:

Table 160. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) -maximum cable lengths


1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters



The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030)Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used toattach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectorssupport the following cable lengths:

Table 161. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximumcable lengths



Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 189

Table 161. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximumcable lengths (continued)





Note: Feature code 1030 requires Data ONTAP 7.3 or higher.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033)Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror over FibreChannel.


Note: Feature code 1033 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.1 or higher.

Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036)Feature code 1036 is a dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.

This adapter may only be used to provide additional target ports. It is not used forattaching N series storage expansion units. It auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.

This adapter has two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors. This adaptersupports the following cable lengths:

Table 162. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1036) - maximum cable lengths

Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fiber62.5 micron multi-modefiber






Dual-port Mini-SAS Adapter (FC 1060)Feature code 1060 is a PCIe adapter with two SAS ports for connecting SAS-basedstorage (EXN3000) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapter operates at 3Gbps.




Single-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1062)Feature code 1062 is a PCIe adapter with one 10-Gb Ethernet port for connectingthe N series controller to 10-Gb Ethernet networks.



Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (optical)(FC 1063)

Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter ships with SFPsplugged into the bare cage connectors on the card to attach to LC cables.



Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Target Adapter (copper)(FC 1064)

Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter has bare cageconnectors that enable attachment to copper cables with integral SFPs.



Appendix D. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 191

Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 andN5500 systems

The N5200 and N5500 support a variety of optional adapter cards.

Table 163. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 models

Feature Code Feature Code Description

1003 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical)

1004 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

1005 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment

1006 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateways andMetroCluster filer configurations)

1007 Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)

1008 Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) (optical)

1009 Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper)

1010 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper)

1011 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical)

1016 SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter

1018 Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only)

1019 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA

1020 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)

1027 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

1034 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBANote: FC 1034 is supported for N5200 and N5500 systems running DataONTAP 7.2.2 and higher versions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is notsupported for N5200 and N5500 systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x orData ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode.

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N5200and N5500:

1. Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA) cards (FC 1004, 1005, 1006, 1018,1019, 1027, and 1034)

2. Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapters (FC 1010 and 1011)

3. Ethernet Network Interface Cards (FC 1003, 1007, 1008, 1009, and 1020)

4. SCSI Dual-channel Ultra320 LVD adapter for tape attachment (FC 1016)

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer tothe IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) (FC 1003)Feature code 1003 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet network interface card. Theadapter supports 10000BASE-SX network topologies. The adapter has two LCduplex connectors and supports 50- micron and 62.5-micron multi-mode fibre(MMF). The maximum cable distance is 550 meters using 50-micron MMF and 275m using 62.5-micron MMF.


For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter isthree. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapteris six.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority for this adapter is slots 3, 4and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority for this adapter is slots1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004)Feature code 1004 is a dual-port 2-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA interface for diskstorage expansion unit (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) attachment. FC 1004is used on all models of the N5200 and N5500 filers (A10 and A20) for attachingEXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000 disk storage expansion units.

This adapter provides two 2-Gbps LC connectors that support 50-micron or62.5-micron multi-mode fibre. The adapter auto-negotiates to 1 or 2 Gbps.

The maximum cable distances supported are shown in Table 164.

Table 164. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004) - maximum cablelengths




For single-node models (A10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. Fordual-node models (A20), the maximum number of this adapter is six.

For single-node models (A10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter isslots 2, 3 and 4. For dual-node models (A20), the slot priority order for installing thisadapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005)Feature code 1005 is a dual-port Fibre Channel HBA interface for tape connectivity.This adapter is a 64-bit 133MHx 2 Gbps Fibre Channel adapter. It auto-negotiatesto 2 and 1 Gbps. The adapter has two LC style connectors and supports 50-micronand 62.5-micron multi-mode fibre.

This adapter supports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 165.

Table 165. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005) - maximum cablelengths






For single-node models (A10 and G10) the slot priority order for this adapter is slots4, 3 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20) the slot priority order for thisadapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway andMetroCluster filer) (FC 1006)

Feature code 1006 is a 2-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment. Thisadapter provides two 2-Gbps LC connectors that support 50 micron or 62.5 micronmulti-mode fibre. The adapter auto-negotiates to 1 or 2 Gbps.

The maximum cable distances supported are shown in Table 166

Table 166. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and MetroClusterfiler) (FC 1006) - maximum cable lengths




This adapter is used for two purposes:

v On N5200 and N5500 gateways (G10 and G20), this adapter is used forattaching N5200 or N5500 storage controllers directly to back-end disk systemsor to Fibre Channel switches, which are then connected to back-end disksystems.

v In a fabric MetroCluster environment, this adapter is used for attaching dual-nodeN5200 and N5500 filer models (A20) to the Fibre Channel switches that are usedin a fabric MetroCluster configuration. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, FC1018 (Dual-port MetroCluster HBA) is also required.

For single-node models (G10) the maximum number of this adapter is three. Fordual-node models (A20 and G20) the maximum number of this adapter is six.

For single-node models (G10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is 2, 3and 4. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for installing thisadapter is 2, 1, and 4.

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007)Feature code 1007 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface card.This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T networktopologies. This adapter has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum cabledistance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair(UTP) media.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter istwo. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter isfour.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter isslots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for thisadapter is slots 1, 2, and 4.

Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems 195

Single-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10-GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1008)Feature code 1008 is a single-port 10 GbE (10GBASE-SR) fibre short-range (SR)PCI-X adapter with a single LC duplex connector. It supports a maximum distanceof 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multi-mode fibre (MMF) media.


For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter isslots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for thisadapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) (FC 1009)Feature code 1009 is a four-port gigabit Ethernet network interface card thatprovides full TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) capability and iSCSI acceleration. TheTOE function includes TCP and UDP checksum offload and large send offload. TheiSCSI acceleration includes header and data digest (CRC) generation andverification.

This gigabit Ethernet (1000Base-T) PCI-X TOE feature provides four RJ-45connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 meters using Category 5, orbetter, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.


For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter isslots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for thisadapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010)Feature code 1010 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. Theadapter has two copper RJ-45 connections.


For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing thisadapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priorityorder for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011)Feature code 1011 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapterhas two optical LC duplex connectors.



For single-node models (A10 and G10) the slot priority order for installing thisadapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priorityorder for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD Tape Adapter (FC 1016)Feature code 1016 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel LVD adapter. This adaptercontains two 68-pin VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B) andtwo 68-pin VHDCI internal connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Customers areonly expected to use the two external connectors.

This feature code includes two SCSI LVD two-meter cables for attaching tapedevices to this SCSI HBA. Each cable has two 68-pin VHDCI connectors, one ateach end.

For single-node models (A10 and G10) the maximum number of this adapter isthree. For dual-node models (A20 and G20) the maximum number of this adapter issix.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing thisadapter is slots 4, 3, and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priorityorder for installing this adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only)(FC 1018)

Feature code 1018 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required byMetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remoteadvanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches arerequired. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic iscarried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normalInfiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, two of these adapter cards must be ordered(one for each node of a dual-node cluster).

This adapter must be installed in slot 2.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP Version 7.2.3 or later.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019)Feature code 1019 is a PCI-X dual-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional FCP target ports; it may not beused to attach storage expansion units. FCP target ports are used by applicationservers on a Fibre Channel storage area network (SAN) for performing I/O to LUNson the N5200 or N5500 using Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP). It auto-negotiates tospeeds of 1, 2, or 4 Gbps.

Two SFF multi-mode optical ports with LC connectors support the cable lengthsshown in Table 167 on page 198.


Table 167. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019) - Maximum cable lengths





For a single-node model (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter istwo. For a dual-node model (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter isfour.

For single-node models, the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 3, 4and 2. For dual-node models, the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1020)Feature code 1020 is a 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. It supports 10BASE-T,100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T network topologies. The adapter provides twoRJ-45 connections and supports a maximum cable length of 100 meters usingCategory 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) media.


For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing thisadapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priorityorder for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for Disk (FC 1027)Feature code 1027 is a quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA). Itauto-negotiates to 4, 2, and 1 Gbps. It may only be used for attaching storageexpansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports onthis adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has four small form factor (SFP) multi-mode optics with LC styleconnectors. It supports the cable lengths shown in Table 168

Table 168. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1027) - Maximumcable lengths





For single-node models (A10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. Fordual-node models (A20), the maximum number of this adapter is six.


Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupiedby the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for thisadapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034)Feature code 1034 is a 4-Gbps PCI-X card used to support SnapMirror over FibreChannel.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-nodemodels, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupiedby the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for thisadapter is 3 and 4. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1 and 4.

Note: This feature is supported for N5200 and N5500 systems running DataONTAP 7.2.2 and higher versions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supportedfor N5200 and N5500 systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or Data ONTAP8.x 7-Mode.


Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 andN5600 systems

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in the N5300 and N5600.

Table 169. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600

Featurecode Feature code description Supported platform

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) N5300, N5600

1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) N5300, N5600

1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for diskattachment

N5300, N5600

1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tapeattachment

N5300, N5600

1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N5300, N5600

1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) N5300, N5600

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) N5300, N5600

1026 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) N5300, N5600

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tapeattachment

N5300, N5600

1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter(PCIe)

N5300, N5600

1031 Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter N5300, N5600

1032 Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/G20 models only) N5300, N5600

1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA N5300, N5600

1035 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape anddisk attachment

N5300, N5600

1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N5300, N5600

1056 16-GB Performance Accelerator Module (PAM) N5300, N5600

1058 256-GB Flash Cache moduleNote: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred toas Performance Acceleration Modules (PAM) II.

N5600

1061 Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter N5300, N5600

1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) TargetAdapter (optical)

N5300, N5600

1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) TargetAdapter (copper)

N5300, N5600

1065 Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N5300, N5600

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N5300and N5600:

1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units (FC 1014, 1029,1035, 1061)

2. Storage adapters for mirroring or MetroCluster configurations (FC 1032, 1033)

3. Performance Acceleration modules (PAM) or Flash Cache modules (FC 1056,1058)


4. Adapters for host block access (FC 1017, 1021, 1026, 1030, 1063, 1064, 1065)

5. Network Interface cards (1012, 1013, 1023, 1031)

6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015, 1035)

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceedthree. For the dual-node models the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceedsix.


Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. Thisadapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of thisadapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximumnumber of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied bythe NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for thisadapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adaptersupports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. Thisadapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 metersusing Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.



Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapterauto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching"back-end" storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). TheFibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-styleconnectors. This adapter supports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 170on page 203.


Table 170. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cablelengths







Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adaptersupports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 171.

Table 171. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cablelengths








Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providingtwo additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching storageexpansion units (EXN1000s, EXN2000s, and EXN4000s).

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adaptersupports the maximum cable lengths shown in Table 172 on page 204.

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems 203








Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021)Feature code 1021 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapteris three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of thisadapter is six.





Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)Feature code 1026 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.




Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tape attachment (FC1029)

Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape or diskstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storagecontrollers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors supportthe cable lengths shown in Table 173.

Table 173. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk/tape attachment (FC 1029) -maximum cable lengths






For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10) the maximum number of this adapter isthree. For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20) the maximum number of thisadapter is six.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For a single-node configuration, the slot priorityorder is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Support and cabling rules for the HBAThis HBA supports Fibre Channel storage expansion units and tape devices. Itsupports all IBM N series Fibre Channel disk devices, subject to current loop mixingrestrictions, as well as third-party Fibre Channel tape devices and libraries. You canmix Fibre Channel storage expansion units and Fibre Channel tape devices on thesame HBA. You must cable them by port pairs of A/B and C/D, as described in thetable below.

The following are not supported by these HBAs:

v Fabric-attached MetroCluster configurations by the 1035 HBA

v Gateway systems

v HBA target mode

Cabling rules for stand-alone controllersThe following table shows valid cabling combinations by port and device.

Ports A and B Ports C and D

N series storage expansion units N series storage expansion units

N series storage expansion units Tape/library devices

Tape/library devices N series storage expansion units

Tape/library devices Tape/library devices


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030)Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used toattach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectorssupport the cable lengths shown in Table 174.






For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10) the maximum number of thisadapter is three . For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20) the maximumnumber of this adapter is six.



Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031)Feature code 1031 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe TOE adapter feature that providesdual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media.



Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032)Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required byMetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remoteadvanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches arerequired. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic iscarried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normalInfiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration (2868/2869-A20/G20), two of these adaptercards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster).






Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied bythe NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for thisadapter is 3 and 4. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1 and 4.


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment(FC 1035)

Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and diskstorage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storagecontrollers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors supportthe cable lengths shown in Table 175.

Table 175. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) -maximum cable lengths






For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10) the maximum number of this adapter isthree. For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20) the maximum number of thisadapter is six.


Support and cabling rules for the HBAThis HBA supports Fibre Channel storage expansion units and tape devices. Itsupports all IBM N series Fibre Channel disk devices, subject to current loop mixingrestrictions, as well as third-party Fibre Channel tape devices and libraries. You canmix Fibre Channel storage expansion units and Fibre Channel tape devices on thesame HBA. You must cable them by port pairs of A/B and C/D, as described in thetable below.

The following are not supported by these HBAs:

v Fabric-attached MetroCluster configurations by the 1035 HBA

v Gateway systems


v HBA target mode

Cabling rules for stand-alone controllersThe following table shows valid cabling combinations by port and device.

Ports A and B Ports C and D

N series storage expansion units N series storage expansion units

N series storage expansion units Tape/library devices

Tape/library devices N series storage expansion units

Tape/library devices Tape/library devices









For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six.

For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-nodeconfiguration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

16-GB Performance Accelerator module (PCIe) (FC 1056)Feature code 1056 is a PCIe adapter with 16 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a performance acceleration module. It is designed to augment thesystem's memory and improve performance with some applications when aconfiguration has a limited number of disks. This design allows the N series diskconfiguration to be sized based on capacity, rather than performance requirements.

Use of the 16-GB Performance Accelerator module (PCIe) (FC 1056) requires theFlexScale software feature.

For the single-node N5300 models the maximum number of this adapter is one. Forthe dual-node N5300 models the maximum number of this adapter is two.

For the single-node N5600 models the maximum number of this adapter is two. Forthe dual-node N5600 models the maximum number of this adapter is four.


This adapter is a PCIe adapter.

For the N5300: For both single-node and dual-node configurations, the slot priorityorder is 4, 2.

For the N5600: For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 4, 2. For adual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 4.

256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058)Feature code 1058 is a PCIe adapter with 256 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the secondgeneration of PCIe caching module adapters for N series systems. It is designed toaugment the system's onboard memory, improving performance with someconfigurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based onrequired capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles insome environments and helping to improve capacity utilization. For moreinformation about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix J, “Installing or replacing aPerformance Acceleration Module,” on page 241.

Use of the 256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058) requires the Flash Cachemodule software feature.

Note: Flash Cache modules were formerly referred to as Performance AccelerationModules (PAM) II.

FC 1058 is not supported for N5300 models.

For the single-node N5600 models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. Forthe dual-node N5600 models the maximum number of this adapter is four.

The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 2.


Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS Adapter (FC 1061)Feature code 1061 is a PCIe adapter with four SAS ports for connecting N seriesSAS-based storage (EXN3000) behind the N series controller. The SAS adapteroperates at 3 Gbps.


For single-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2. Fordual-node models, the slot priority order for this adapter is 2, 1, 4.




Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter ships with SFPsplugged into the bare cage connectors on the card to attach to LC cables.





Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks. The adapter has bare cageconnectors that enable attachment to copper cables with integral SFPs.




Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065)Feature code 1065 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature that provides dualLC duplex connectors. The adapter has dual bare-cage connectors that requirepurchasing and inserting FC 2012 (10 GbE SFP+ optic module) to connect to LCcables. Alternatively, you can use FC 1053/1054/1055 copper cables, whereappropriate, which have integral SFPs.

FC 1065 supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm)multimode fiber (MMF) media.

Cable feature 10-GbE Fi cable 30m LC/SC (FC 1047) can optionally be orderedwith this feature.





Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000series systems

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in N6000 series systems.

Table 177. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems

FeatureCode Feature Code Description Supported systems

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) N6040, N6060, N6070

1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) N6040, N6060, N6070


N6040, N6060, N6070


N6040, N6060, N6070

1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N6040, N6060, N6070

1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) N6040, N6060, N6070

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) N6040, N6060, N6070

1026 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) N6040, N6060, N6070

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk andtape attachment

N6040, N6060, N6070

1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N6040, N6060, N6070

1031 Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter N6040, N6060, N6070

1032 Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/A21/A22models only)

N6040, N6060, N6070

1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA N6040, N6060, N6070


N6040, N6060, N6070

1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N6040, N6060, N6070

1056 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module (PAM) N6040, N6060, N6070

1057 512-GB Flash Cache moduleNote: Flash Cache modules were formerlyreferred to as Performance Acceleration Modules(PAM) II.

N6070


N6040, N6060

1061 Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter N6040, N6060, N6070

1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)Target Adapter (optical)

N6040, N6060, N6070

1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)Target Adapter (copper)

N6040, N6060, N6070

1065 Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N6040, N6060, N6070

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N6000series system:




3. Performance Acceleration modules (PAMs) or Flash Cache modules (FC 1056,1057, 1058)

4. Adapters for host block access (FC 1017, 1021, 1026, 1030, 1036, 1063, 1064,1065)

5. Network Interface cards (FC 1012, 1013, 1023, 1031)

6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015, 1029)

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed four.For the dual-node (active/active or high availability) models, the total number ofPCIe adapters cannot exceed eight.


Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. Thisadapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight.

The slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 3, 2, 1.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adaptersupports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. Thisadapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 metersusing Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.



Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapterauto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attachingsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, andEXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP targetports.




















Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providingtwo additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching N series storageexpansion units.






Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N6000 series systems 213

Table 180. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cablelengths (continued)



For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four.


Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021)Feature code 1021 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.






Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)Feature code 1026 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.



Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment(FC 1029)

Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported Nseries disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) and tapedevices to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical portswith LC connectors support the following cable lengths:


Table 181. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk and tape attachment (FC 1029) -maximum cable lengths








Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030)Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used toattach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectorssupport the following cable lengths:






For the single-node model the maximum number of this adapter is four. For thedual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is eight.







Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21/A22 only) (FC 1032)Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required byMetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remoteadvanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches arerequired. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic iscarried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normalInfiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, two of these adapter cards must be ordered(one for each node of a dual-node cluster).



For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two.

The slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4.


Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape andsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, andEXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connectionsof 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical portswith LC connectors support the following cable lengths:







Note: This adapter is not supported for N6000 series MetroCluster configurationsor filers with gateway features.














16 GB Performance Acceleration Module (FC 1056)Feature code 1056 is a PCIe adapter with 16 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a performance acceleration module. It is designed to augment thesystem's memory and improve performance with some applications when aconfiguration has a limited number of disks. This design allows the N series diskconfiguration to be sized based on capacity, rather than performance requirements.For more information about PAM cards, see Appendix J, “Installing or replacing aPerformance Acceleration Module,” on page 241.

Use of the 16 GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) requires theFlexScale software feature.

For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four for theN6070 and two for the N6040 or N6060. For the dual-node model, the maximumnumber of this adapter is four.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For both single-node and dual-node configurations,the slot priority order is 1, 2. 3. 4.


512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057)Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the secondgeneration of caching module adapters for N series systems. It is designed toaugment the system's onboard memory, improving performance with someconfigurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based onrequired capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles insome environments and helping to improve capacity utilization. For more


information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix J, “Installing or replacing aPerformance Acceleration Module,” on page 241.



For the single-node N6070, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For thedual-node N6070, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For both single-node and dual-node configurations,the slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4.


256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058)Feature code 1058 is a PCIe adapter with 256 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a Flash Cache module. The Flash Cache module is the secondgeneration of caching module adapters for N series systems. It is designed toaugment the system's onboard memory, improving performance with someconfigurations. The design allows the N series system to be sized based onrequired capacity instead of performance, reducing the need for excess spindles insome environments and helping to improve capacity utilization. For moreinformation about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix J, “Installing or replacing aPerformance Acceleration Module,” on page 241.



For the single-node N6040, the maximum number of this adapter is one. For thedual-node N6040, the maximum number of this adapter is two.

For the single-node N6060, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For thedual-node N6060, the maximum number of this adapter is four.









Feature code 1063 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes optical connections to the FCoE networks.





Feature code 1064 is a PCIe adapter with two Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)ports for connecting the N series controller to FCoE environments. This adapterutilizes copper connections to the FCoE networks.




Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065)Feature code 1065 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature provides dual LCduplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media.

Cable features 5m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1045), 30m 50-micron MMF Cable(FC 1046), 10-GbE Fi cable 30m LC/SC (FC 1047), or 10-GbE Fi cable 5m LC/SC(FC 1048) can optionally be ordered with this feature. FC 1045 and FC 1046 areLC/LC cables; FC 1047 and FC 1048 are LC/SC cables.





Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200series systems

IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in N6200 series systems.

Table 185. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems

FeatureCode Feature Code Description Supported models

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) All N6200 series models


All N6200 series models



1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA All N6200 series models

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) All N6200 series models

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for diskattachment


1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA All N6200 series models

1035 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tapeand disk attachment


1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA All N6200 series models

1057 512-GB Flash Cache module N6240 only

1058 256-GB Flash Cache module All N6200 series models

1061 Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter All N6200 series models

1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)Target Adapter (optical)


1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)Target Adapter (copper)


1065 Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC All N6200 series models

1066 8-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA N6210-C20 and N6240-E21only

1067 8-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA All N6200 series models

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N6200series system:



3. Flash Cache modules (FC 1057, 1058)

4. Adapters for host block access (FC 1017, 1030, 1036, 1063, 1064, 1065)

5. Network Interface cards (FC 1012)

6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1015)

For model C10, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed two. For modelsC20 and C21, the total number cannot exceed four. For model E11, the totalnumber cannot exceed 6. For model E21, the total number cannot exceed 12.



Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. Thisadapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMFmedia.

For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The maximum number of thisadapter is two per controller module. The slot priority order is 1, 2.

For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapter is six percontroller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapterauto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attachingsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, andEXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP targetports.









Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This feature code includes a50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optical ports with LC connectors. The FibreChannel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.









Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.This adapter is used for providing two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is notused for attaching N series storage expansion units.

Note: All FC target ports must be either onboard FC ports or FC HBA ports (usingFC 1017); they may not be used in combination.

This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter has two SFFmulti-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter supports the followingmaximum cable lengths.











Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N6200 series systems 223

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029)Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported Nseries disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to Nseries storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps,2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LCconnectors support the following cable lengths:

Table 189. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximumcable lengths








Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (FC 1030)Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used toattach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectorssupport the following cable lengths:







For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: For systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.5, themaximum number of this adapter is four per controller module. For systems runningData ONTAP 8.0.1 and later, the maximum number of this adapter is six percontroller module. The slot priority order is 3, 4, 5, 6, 1, 2.



Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape andsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, andEXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connectionsof 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical portswith LC connectors support the following cable lengths:






Note: The ports of this adapter cannot be used as FCP target ports. This adaptercannot be used for MetroCluster configurations.




This adapter is only used to provide additional target ports. It is not used forattaching N series storage expansion units. It auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.










512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057)Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a Flash Cache module. Feature code 1057 is only supported for theN6240.

The Flash Cache module is the second generation of caching module designed forN series systems. It augments the system's onboard memory, improvingperformance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to besized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need forexcess spindles in some environments and helping to improve capacity utilization.For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix J, “Installing orreplacing a Performance Acceleration Module,” on page 241.


For all models, the maximum number of this adapter is one per controller module.

For N6210-C10, N6210-C20 and N6240-C21: The slot priority order is 1, 2.

For N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.

256-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1058)Feature code 1058 is a PCIe adapter with 256 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a Flash Cache module.

The Flash Cache module is the second generation of caching module designed forN series systems. It augments the system's onboard memory, improvingperformance with some configurations. The design allows the N series system to besized based on required capacity instead of performance, reducing the need forexcess spindles in some environments and helping to improve capacity utilization.For more information about Flash Cache modules, see Appendix J, “Installing orreplacing a Performance Acceleration Module,” on page 241.


For N6210-C10 and N6210-C20: The maximum number of this adapter is one percontroller node. The slot priority order is 1, 2.

For N6240-C21, N6240-E11 and N6240-E21: The maximum number of this adapteris two per controller node. The slot priority order is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.













Dual-port 10-Gbps Ethernet NIC (FC 1065)Feature code 1065 is a dual-port 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature thatprovides two SFP+ ports on the adapter.

To use optical LC fiber optic cables, one SFP+ optical module (FC 2012) is requiredfor each optical port. To connect to a switch using copper SFP+ cables, use one FC1055 per port (each feature provides one passive, copper, SFP+ cable).



8-Gbps MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1066)FC 1066 is PCIe adapter is used only in support of the MetroCluster licensefunction feature and compatible switches. It provides the connection heartbeat forthe cluster over a Fibre Channel link. One is used per node in a FabricMetroCluster implementation. This adapter is not required for Stretch MetroClusterinstallations.

FC 1066 is supported only for the N6210-C20 and N6240-E21 models.

For all supported N6200 series models, the maximum number of this adapter is oneper controller node.


8-Gbps SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1067)FC 1067 provides one 8-Gb PCIe card for support of SnapMirror over FibreChannel. Use this feature to configure 8-Gbps Fibre Channel for SnapMirror.

For all supported N6200 series models, the maximum number of this adapter is oneper controller module. The slot priority is 2.


Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 seriessystems

IBM supports optional adapter cards in the N7000 series models.

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N7000series models:

1. Storage adapters for attaching disk storage expansion units or disk systems (FC1014, 1029, 1035, 1061)

2. Storage adapters for mirroring and MetroCluster configurations (FC 1032, 1033and 1034)

3. Performance Acceleration modules (PAM) or Flash Cache modules (FC 1056,1057)

4. Storage adapter for host block access (FC 1010, 1011, 1017, 1021, 1026, 1030,1036, 1063, 1064, 1065)

5. Network Interface cards (FC 1007, 1008, 1009, 1012, 1013, 1023, 1031)

6. Storage adapters for tape attachment (FC 1016, 1015, 1029. 1035)

PCI-X AdaptersAll N7000 models support the following PCI-X adapters.

Table 193. Optional PCI-X Adapters

Feature Code Feature Code Description Models Supported

1007 Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) N7700, N7900

1008 Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) TOE(optical)

N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

1009 Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) TOE (copper) N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

1010 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iSCSI targetadapter (copper)

N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

1011 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iSCSI targetadapter (optical)

N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

1016 SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel tape HBA N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

1034 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBANote: FC 1034 is supported for N7000 seriessystems running Data ONTAP 7.2.2 and higherversions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supportedfor N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP7.3.x or Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode.

N7700, N7900,N7600, N7800

For single-node models, the total number of PCI-X adapters cannot exceed three.For dual-node models, the total number of PCI-X adapters cannot exceed six. Fordual-node models, adapters must be ordered in pairs, one for each node.

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007)Feature code 1007 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface card.This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T network


topologies. This adapter has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum cabledistance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair(UTP) media.


Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. Theslot priority order for this adapter is 9, 3, 4.


Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008)Feature code 1008 is a single-port 10 GbE (10GBASE-SR) fibre short-range (SR)PCI-X adapter with a single LC duplex connector. This adapter supports amaximum distance of 300 meters using 850 nanometer (nm) multi-mode fibre(MMF) media.


Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. Theslot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOEadapter is not permitted in slot 4.

Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009)Feature code 1009 is a quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T) adapter. Theadapter has four copper RJ-45 connections. This adapter supports a maximumdistance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP)four-pair media.


Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. Theslot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOEadapter is not permitted in slot 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010)Feature code 1010 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. Theadapter has two copper RJ-45 connections.



Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011)Feature code 1011 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapterhas two optical LC duplex connectors.




SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016)Feature code 1016 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel LVD adapter. This adaptercontains two 68-pin VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B) andtwo 68-pin VHDCI internal connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Customers areonly expected to use the two external connectors.

This feature code includes two SCSI LVD two-meter cables for attaching tapedevices to this SCSI HBA. Each cable has two 68-pin VHDCI connectors, one ateach end.

For the single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For thedual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is six.


SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034)Feature code 1034 is a 4-Gbps PCI-X card used to support SnapMirror over FibreChannel.



Note: FC 1034 is supported for N7000 series systems running Data ONTAP 7.2.2and higher versions of Data ONTAP 7.2.x. It is not supported for N7000series systems running Data ONTAP 7.3.x or Data ONTAP 8.x 7-Mode.

PCI-Express (PCIe) adaptersN7000 series models support the following PCIe adapters.

Table 194. Optional PCIe adapters

FeatureCode Feature Code Description Models Supported

1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800


N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800


N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

Appendix I. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 231

Table 194. Optional PCIe adapters (continued)

FeatureCode Feature Code Description Models Supported

1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1026 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter(copper)

N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk ortape attachment

N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1030 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1031 Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1032 Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/A21 modelsonly)

N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800


N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1036 Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1056 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module (PAM) N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800


N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1061 Quad-port 3-Gbps SAS adapter N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1063 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)Target adapter (optical)

N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1064 Dual-port Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE)Target adapter (copper)

N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

1065 Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC N7700, N7900, N7600,N7800

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed five.For the dual-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed ten.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. Thisadapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275musing 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For adual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.


Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adaptersupports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. Thisadapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 metersusing Category 5 or better UTP four-pair media.



Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapterauto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attachingsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000).The Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.



















This feature code will include a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LCconnectors.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providingtwo additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching storageexpansion units.







For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For thedual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight.


Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021)Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE)adapter that provides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iSCSIhosts.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For dual-nodemodels, the maximum number of this adapter is ten.


Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023)Feature code 1023 is a 10/100/1000 Ethernet (10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and1000Base-T) PCIe feature that provides four RJ-45 connectors. The maximumsupported distance is 100 meters using Category 5, or better, unshielded twistedpair (UTP) four-pair media.

For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For thedual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten.



Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target PCIe adapter that providestwo Ethernet iSCSI ports to be configured as target connections for iSCSI hosts.



Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC1029)

Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching supported Nseries disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000) or tapedevices to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical portswith LC connectors support the following cable lengths:

Table 198. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk or tape attachment (FC 1029) -maximum cable lengths







This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For adual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030)Feature code 1030 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used toattach storage expansion units. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectorssupport the following cable lengths:





Table 199. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1030) - maximumcable lengths (continued)




For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For thedual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight.







Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/A21 only) (FC 1032)Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required byMetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remoteadvanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches arerequired. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic iscarried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normalInfiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration (2866/2867-A20/A21), two of these adaptercards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster).






This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8. For a dual-nodeconfiguration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8.



Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape andsupported N series disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN4000)to N series storage controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps,2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LCconnectors support the following cable lengths:







Note: This adapter is not supported for N7000 series MetroCluster configurationsor filers with gateway features.


This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For adual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036)Feature code 1036 is a PCIe dual-port 8-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. Thisadapter may only be used to provide additional target ports; it may not be used toattach storage expansion units or backend gateway storage. It auto-negotiatesconnections of 1 Gbps, 2 Gbps, 4 Gbps, or 8 Gbps.

Two SFP multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cablelengths:

Table 201. Dual-port 8-Gbps Fibre Channel Target adapter (PCIe) (FC 1036) - maximumcable lengths







This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.3.1, or later.



16-GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056)Feature code 1056 is a PCIe adapter with 16 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a performance acceleration module. It is designed to augment thesystem's memory and improve performance with some applications when aconfiguration has a limited number of disks. This design allows the N series diskconfiguration to be sized based on capacity, rather than performance requirements.For more information about PAM cards, see Appendix J, “Installing or replacing aPerformance Acceleration Module,” on page 241.

Use of the 16-GB Performance Acceleration Module I (FC 1056) requires theFlexScale software feature.

For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four for theN7600 and N7700 and five for the N7800 and N7900. For the dual-node model, themaximum number of this adapter is eight for the N7600 and N7700 and ten for theN7800 and N7900.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,and 8.

For all models of the N7600 and N7700: The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7 and 8.

For single-node models of the N7800 and N7900: The slot priority order is 5, 6,7, 8 and 1.

For dual-node models of the N7800 and N7900: The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7,8 and 2.

512-GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057)Feature code 1057 is a PCIe adapter with 512 GB of onboard cache memory thatworks as a Flash Cache module. It is designed to augment the system's onboardmemory, improving performance with some configurations. The design allows the Nseries system to be sized based on required capacity instead of performance,reducing the need for excess spindles in some environments and helping toimprove capacity utilization. For more information about Flash Cache modules, seeAppendix J, “Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module,” on page241.

Use of the 512 GB Flash Cache module (FC 1057) requires the Flash Cachemodule software feature.



For the single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two for theN7600 and N7700 and four for the N7800 and N7900. For the dual-node model, themaximum number of this adapter is four for the N7600 and N7700 and eight for theN7800 and N7900.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.The slot priority order is 5, 6, 7 and 8.

Notes:

1. For the N7600, N7700 and N7900, feature code 1057 requires Data ONTAP7.3.2 or higher.

2. For the N7800, feature code 1057 requires Data ONTAP 7.3.3 or higher.


For single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is five. For dual-nodemodels the maximum number of this adapter is ten.














Dual-port 10-Gbps NIC (FC 1065)Feature code 1065 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe NIC adapter feature provides dual LCduplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media.

Cable features 5m 50-micron MMF Cable (FC 1045), 30m 50-micron MMF Cable(FC 1046), 10-GbE Fi cable 30m LC/SC (FC 1047), or 10-GbE Fi cable 5m LC/SC(FC 1048) can optionally be ordered with this feature. FC 1045 and FC 1046 areLC/LC cables; FC 1047 and FC 1048 are LC/SC cables.





Appendix J. Installing or replacing a PerformanceAcceleration Module

This section contains information and processes for the following:

v “System requirements”

v “Before you begin”

v “Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module” on page 242

v “Enabling the WAFL extended cache software license and functionality” on page243

v “Enabling the WAFL extended cache configuration options” on page 243

v “Completing the replacement process” on page 244

For information about the Performance Acceleration Module (PAM) LEDs, refer tothe IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide or to the flyer thatshipped with your PAM.

System requirementsYour system must be running the minimum version of Data ONTAP required foryour module type. For the most up-to-date information about supported DataONTAP versions for your module, see the IBM System Storage N seriesIntroduction and Planning Guide (this document) or the Hardware and ServiceGuide for your N series system, located at:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas

Before you beginDepending on whether you are installing a Performance Acceleration Module for thefirst time, replacing an existing module, or installing an additional module, yoursystem must meet the criteria specified for your applicable installation type below.

First time installations:v Your system must be running the minimum version of Data ONTAP required for

the module type you are installing.

v The platform on which you are installing the module must be supported. For themost up-to-date list of supported platforms, see the IBM System Storage N seriesIntroduction and Planning Guide (this document) or the Hardware and ServiceGuide for your N series system, located at:


v Your system must have an available PCI-e slot (one slot for each module), andyou must have checked the IBM System Storage N series Introduction andPlanning Guide (this document) or the Hardware and Service Guide for your Nseries system.

v You must have the software license key and download instructions that camewith your order.

v If you are installing the module in an active/active or high availabilityconfiguration, you must install an equal number of modules in each system.

v All other components in the system must be functioning properly.




Replacement or additional module installationsv Your system must be running the minimum version of Data ONTAP required for

the module type you are installing.

v If you are installing additional modules in an active/active or high availabilityconfiguration, you must install an equal number of modules in each system.

v If you are installing additional modules, your system must have an availablePCI-e slot (one slot for each module), and you must have checked the IBMSystem Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide (this document) or theHardware and Service Guide for your N series system for the assigned moduleslots for your system.

v If you are installing additional modules, they must be the same type module asyou currently have installed.

You cannot mix 16-GB, 256-GB, and 512-GB modules in the same system.

v If you are upgrading the 16-GB modules in your system with 256-GB or 512-GBmodules, you must have the correct software license for your replacementmodule type.

There are two different WAFL® extended cache software licenses. One is usedwith the 16-GB module and one is used with the 256-GB and 512-GB modules.

v All other components in the system must be functioning properly.

Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration ModuleAttention: This procedure is disruptive for single-controller configurations, and isrecommended to be performed on single-controller configurations only during amaintenance window. For active/active or high availability configurations, this is anondisruptive procedure.

To install or replace a module, complete the following steps:

1. Shut down the controller module.

See the Hardware and Service Guide for your applicable platform.

2. Open your system.


3. Remove an existing module (if necessary).

See the Hardware and Service Guide for your applicable platform. For detailedinformation, see the section “Replacing PCI Cards and Risers” or “ReplacingPCI adapters”.

4. Install the module.

See the Hardware and Service Guide for your applicable platform. For detailedinformation, see the section “Replacing PCI Cards and Risers” or “ReplacingPCI adapters”.

Note: For active/active or high availability configurations, if you are installing amodule for the first time or adding an additional module, you mustinstall an equal number of modules in each node.

5. Close and boot your system.


6. Run diagnostics on the new module (for first time installations only).

See the IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide for information aboutspecific diagnostics tests you can perform for PCI cards, located at:




7. Complete the installation process:

v If you are installing an additional module in a system with preexistingmodules, you have completed the installation process.

v If you are replacing a failed module, go to step 10.

v If you are installing a module for the first time in a system or upgrading the16-GB modules in your system with 256-GB or 512-GB modules, completesteps 8 and 9.

8. Enable the WAFL extended cache software.

See “Enabling the WAFL extended cache software license and functionality.”

9. Set the software configuration options.

See “Enabling the WAFL extended cache configuration options.”

10. Complete the replacement process.

See “Completing the replacement process” on page 244.

Enabling the WAFL extended cache software license and functionalityFor first-time installations of a module or upgrading the 16-GB modules in yoursystem with 256-GB or 512-GB modules, complete the following steps:

Note: There are two different WAFL extended cache software licenses. One isused with the 16-GB module and one is used with the 256-GB and 512-GBmodules. You must have the correct software license for your module type.

Note: See the software license key and download instructions that came with yourorder.

1. From the console, enable the WAFL extended cache software license byentering the following command:

license add license key

Result: WAFL extended cache functionality should be enabled automatically.

2. Verify that WAFL extended cache functionality is enabled by entering thefollowing command:

options flexscale.enable

Result: Should be on.

3. Enable the WAFL extended cache configuration options.

v If your system is in a single-controller module configuration, go to “Enablingthe WAFL extended cache configuration options.”

v If your system is in an active/active or high availability configuration, repeatSteps 1 and 2 of this procedure for each node, and then go to “Enabling theWAFL extended cache configuration options.”

Enabling the WAFL extended cache configuration optionsWAFL extended cache configuration options enable you to optimize performance foryour particular workload. Depending on your workload, the following options canapply:

v Caching normal user data blocks

v Caching low-priority user data blocks

v Caching only system metadata

v Integrating FlexShare™ buffer cache policies with WAFL extended cache options

Appendix J. Installing or replacing a Performance Acceleration Module 243

Note: You can set the WAFL extended cache configuration options during moduleinstallation or later. However, it is recommended that you set options at thetime of installation to ensure optimal performance for your workload.

To enable WAFL extended cache configuration options, complete the followingsteps:

1. Read about the WAFL extended cache configuration options in the Data ONTAPSystem Administration Guide.

You can access this document at:


Note: Knowing your application and volume configuration helps you decidewhat configuration options to choose.

2. Follow the applicable option enabling procedures in the Data ONTAP SystemAdministration Guide.

Note: For active/active or high availability configurations, you must configureoptions on each node.

Completing the replacement processIf you have replaced a failed module, return the failed part to IBM. Contact IBMService and Support at 1-800-IBM-SERV (1-800-426-7378) for more information onthe return procedure.



Appendix K. IBM System Storage N series documentation

The following lists present an overview of the IBM System Storage N serieshardware and Data ONTAP product libraries, as well as other related documents.

You can access the documents listed in these tables at the following web site:


N7000 series systems libraryv IBM System Storage N7000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC26-7953

v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,GC26-7954

v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,GC26-7956

N6000 series systems libraryv IBM System Storage N6000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC53-1142-00

v IBM System Storage N6000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,GC53-1143-00

v IBM System Storage N6000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,GC53-1144-00

N5000 series systems libraryv IBM System Storage N5000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC26-7785

v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,GC26-7784

v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,GC26-7838

N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage systems libraryv IBM System Storage N3300, N3400 and N3600 Hardware and Service Guide,

GC27-2280

v IBM System Storage N3300 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2086



N3700 storage system libraryv IBM System Storage N3700 Hardware and Service Guide, GA32-0515

v IBM System Storage N3700 Installation and Setup Instructions, GA32-0517

EXN1000, EXN2000, EXN3000 and EXN4000 storage expansion unitslibrary

v IBM System Storage EXN1000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and ServiceGuide, GC26-7802

v IBM System Storage EXN1000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC26-7786



v IBM System Storage EXN2000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and ServiceGuide, GA32-0516






Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode libraryv IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Release Notes,

GA32-0723-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Upgrade Guide,GA32-0724-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Block AccessManagement Guide for iSCSI and FCP, GA32-0725-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode High AvailabilityConfiguration Guide, GA32-0726-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Commands: ManualPage Reference, Volume 1, GA32-0727-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Commands: ManualPage Reference, Volume 2, GA32-0728-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Core Commands QuickReference, GA32-0729-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Data Protection OnlineBackup and Recovery Guide, GA32-0730-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Data Protection TapeBackup and Recovery Guide, GA32-0731-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode File Access andProtocols Management Guide, GA32-0732-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode MultiStore ManagementGuide, GA32-0733-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Network ManagementGuide, GA32-0734-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Software Setup Guide,GA32-0735-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode Storage ManagementGuide, GA32-0736-00

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode System AdministrationGuide, GA32-0737-00

v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide forthe Data ONTAP 8.0 Release Family, GA32-0783

Data ONTAP 7.3 libraryv IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3.x Release Notes, GC53-1175


Note: Beginning with Data ONTAP 7.3.1, a single Data ONTAP 7.3.x ReleaseNotes covers both filers and gateways.

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3.Release Notes, GC27-2201

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Active/Active ConfigurationGuide, GC27-2208

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 File Access and ProtocolsManagement Guide, GC27-2207

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Storage Management Guide,GC52-1277

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Data Protection Online Backupand Recovery Guide, GC27-2204

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Data Protection Tape Backup andRecovery Guide, GC27-2205

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 MultiStore Management Guide,GC52-1281

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Network Management Guide,GC52-1280

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Commands: Manual PageReference, Volume 1, GC27-2202


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Upgrade Guide, GC27-2200

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Block Access Management Guidefor iSCSI and FCP, GC52-1282

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 System Administration Guide,GC52-1279

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Software Setup Guide,GC27-2206

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Core Commands QuickReference, GC52-1278

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Archive and ComplianceManagement Guide, GC53-1168

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Storage Efficiency ManagementGuide, GA32-0773

v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide forthe Data ONTAP 7.3 Release Family, GC53-1300


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Active/Active ConfigurationGuide, GC26-7964

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 File Access and ProtocolsManagement Guide, GC26-7965

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Storage Management Guide,GC26-7966

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Online Backupand Recovery Guide, GC26-7967

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Tape Backup andRecovery Guide, GC26-7968

Appendix K. IBM System Storage N series documentation 247

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 MultiStore Management Guide,GC26-7969

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Network Management Guide,GC26-7970




v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Block Access Management Guidefor iSCSI & FCP, GC26-7973

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 System Administration Guide,GC26-7974

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Software Setup Guide,GC26-7975

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Core Commands QuickReference, GC26-7977

v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide forData ONTAP 7.2 and Earlier Release Families, GC53-1182


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation andManagement Guide, GC26-7790

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 File Access and ProtocolsManagement Guide, GA32-0520

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Storage Management Guide,GA32-0521

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Online Backupand Recovery Guide, GA32-0522

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Tape Backup andRecovery Guide, GA32-0523

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 MultiStore Management Guide,GA32-0524

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Network Management Guide,GA32-0525

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual PageReference, Volume 1, GA32-0526

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual PageReference, Volume 2, GA32-0527


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Block Access Management Guidefor iSCSI and FCP, GA32-0528

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 System Administration Guide,GA32-0529

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Software Setup Guide,GA32-0530

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Core Commands QuickReference, GA32-0531


v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide forData ONTAP 7.2 and Earlier Release Families, GC53-1182

Data ONTAP 7.2 and later gateway systems libraryv IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2.x Gateway Release Notes,

GC26-7955

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3 Gateway Release Notes,GC27-2189

v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.3.x Release Notes, GC53-1175

Note: Beginning with Data ONTAP 7.3.1, a single Data ONTAP 7.3.x ReleaseNotes® will cover both filers and gateways.

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide, GC53-1150

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Upgrade Guide, GC26-1166

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Setup, Installation, andManagement Guide, GC53-1147

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Installation Requirements and ReferenceGuide, GC53-1148

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Metrocluster Guide, GC53-1149

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for Native DiskShelves, GC27-2188 (for Data ONTAP 7.3 and later gateways only)

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for EMCSymmetrix Storage, GC27-2190

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for HP EVAStorage, GC27-2192

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for HP XPStorage, GC27-2193

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for 3PAR InServStorage, GC27-2195

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for EMCCLARiiON Storage, GC27-2191

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for IBM Storage,GC27-2194

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for IBM SANVolume Controller Storage, GC53-1151

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for HitachiStorage, GC53-1164

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for FujitsuETERNUS Storage, GC53-1165

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for RamSanStorage, GC52-1342

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Implementation Guide for IBM XIVStorage, , GA32-0794

Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems libraryv IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide, GC26-7839

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for IBM Storage,GC26-7840

Appendix K. IBM System Storage N series documentation 249

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for Hitachi Storage,GC26-7841

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for HP Storage,GC26-7858

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Upgrade Guide, GC26-7859

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Setup, Installation, andManagement Guide, GC26-7886

v IBM System Storage N series Gateway 7.1.x Release Notes, GC26-7837

Other N series and N series-related documentsv IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide, GC27-2088 (previously

called the IBM System Storage N series Error Messages and TroubleshootingGuide, GC26-7984)

v IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide, GC26-7789

v IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0543

v IBM System Storage N series AutoSupport Overview, GC26-7854

v IBM System Storage N series: Changing the cluster cfmode Setting in FibreChannel SAN Configurations, GC26-7876

v IBM System Storage N series Brocade 200E and Brocade 5000 SwitchConfiguration Guide, GC52-1284

v IBM System Storage N series Brocade 3000 Series Switch Configuration Guide,GC52-1285

v IBM System Storage N series Brocade 300 and Brocade 5100 SwitchConfiguration Guide, GC53-1167

v IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP-4243-00

v IBM System Storage Systems Safety Notices, G229-9054

v IBM Environmental Notices and User Guide Z125-5823

v IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Service Guide: Models200 and N00, GC26-7993

v IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Service Guide: ModelN42, GC53-1174


Notices

This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document inother countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on theproducts and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBMproduct, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBMproduct, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may beused instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify theoperation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matterdescribed in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you anylicense to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM Director of LicensingIBM CorporationNorth Castle DriveArmonk, NY 10504-1785U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any othercountry where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THISPUBLICATIONS “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHEREXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express orimplied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply toyou.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will beincorporated in new editions of the publications. IBM may make improvementsand/or changes in the product(s) and/or program(s) described in this publication atany time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM web sites are provided forconvenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those websites. The materials at those web sites are not part of the materials for this IBMproduct and use of those web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believesappropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Attention: In compliance with the GNU General Public License (GPL), Version 2,June 1991, a complete machine-readable copy of the source code for the relevantsource code portions of the Remote LAN Module (RLM) Firmware that are coveredby the GPL, is available from ftp://ftp.netapp.com/frm-ntap/opensource/.

CopyrightsCopyright © 2005, 2011 IBM Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.


References in this documentation to IBM products, programs, or services do notimply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBMoperates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended tostate or imply that only IBM's product, program or service may be used. Anyfunctionally equivalent product, program or service that does not infringe any ofIBM's intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, programor service. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with otherproducts, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user's responsibility.

TrademarksIBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com® are trademarks or registered trademarks ofInternational Business Machines Corporation in the United States, other countries,or both. A complete and current list of other IBM trademarks is available on the webat http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml

NetApp, the Network Appliance logo, the bolt design, NetApp–the NetworkAppliance Company, Data ONTAP, DataFabric, FAServer, FilerView, gFiler,MultiStore, NearStore, NetCache, SecureShare, SnapManager, SnapMirror,SnapMover, SnapRestore, SnapVault, SyncMirror, and WAFL are registeredtrademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States, and/or other countries.gFiler, Network Appliance, SnapCopy, SnapLock, Snapshot, and The Evolution ofStorage are trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States and/or othercountries and registered trademarks in some other countries. ApplianceWatch,BareMetal, Camera-to-Viewer, ComplianceClock, ComplianceJournal,ContentDirector, ContentFabric, EdgeFiler, FlexClone, FlexVol, FPolicy, HyperSAN,InfoFabric, LockVault, Manage ONTAP, NOW, NOW NetApp on the web, ONTAPI,RAID-DP, RoboCache, RoboFiler, SecureAdmin, Serving Data by Design,SharedStorage, Simulate ONTAP, Smart SAN, SnapCache, SnapDirector,SnapDrive, SnapFilter, SnapMigrator, SnapSuite, SnapValidator, SohoFiler, vFiler,VFM, Virtual File Manager, VPolicy, and Web Filer are trademarks of NetworkAppliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. NetApp AvailabilityAssurance and NetApp ProTech Expert are service marks of Network Appliance,Inc. in the United States.

Network Appliance is a licensee of the CompactFlash and CF Logo trademarks.

Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or itssubsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation inthe United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and othercountries.

All other brands or products are trademarks or registered trademarks of theirrespective holders and should be treated as such.

Electronic emission noticesThe following statements apply to this product. The statements for other productsintended for use with this product will appear in their accompanying manuals.


http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A StatementThis equipment has been tested and complies with the limits for a Class A digitaldevice, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to providereasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operatedin a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiateradio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with theinstruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmfulinterference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference athis own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order tomeet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or televisioninterference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or byunauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes ormodifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)this device must accept any interference received, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance StatementThis Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d'Industrie CanadaCet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 duCanada.

European Union EMC Directive Conformance StatementThis product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU CouncilDirective 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member Statesrelating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for anyfailure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommendedmodification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

Attention: This is an EN55022 Class A product. In a domestic environment thisproduct may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required totake adequate measures.

Responsible manufacturer:International Business Machines Corp.New Orchard RoadArmonk, New York 10504Tel: 919-499-1900

European community contact:IBM Technical Regulations, Department M456IBM-Allee 1, 71137 Ehningen, GermanyTel: +49 7032 15-2937E-mail: [email protected]

Notices 253

Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility DirectiveDeutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur ElektromagnetischenVerträglichkeit

Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EGzur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeitin den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.

Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zuinstallieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBMempfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM übernimmt keine Verantwortung fürdie Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung derIBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohneEmpfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.

EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:"Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann imWohnbereich Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiberverlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür aufzukommen."

Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetischeVerträglichkeit von Geräten

Dieses Produkt entspricht dem "Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeitvon Geräten (EMVG)". Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG inder Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über dieelektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EGRichtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A

Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG dasEG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen.

Verantwortlich für die Einhaltung der EMV Vorschriften ist der Hersteller:International Business Machines Corp.New Orchard RoadArmonk, New York 10504Tel: 919-499-1900

Der verantwortliche Ansprechpartner des Herstellers in der EU ist:IBM DeutschlandTechnical Regulations, Department M456IBM-Allee 1, 71137 Ehningen, GermanyTel: +49 7032 15-2937E-mail: [email protected]

Generelle Informationen:

Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022Klasse A.


People's Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Japan VCCI Council Class A Statement

Translation: This is a Class A product based on the standard of the VCCI Council.If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio interference may occur,in which case, the user may be required to take corrective actions.

Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association(JEITA) Statement

Japanese Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)Confirmed Harmonics Guideline (products less than or equal to 20 A per phase).

Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association(JEITA) Statement

Japanese Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)Confirmed Harmonics Guideline (products greater than 20 A per phase).

Korea Communications Commission (KCC) StatementPlease note that this equipment has obtained EMC registration for commercial use.In the event that it has been mistakenly sold or purchased, please exchange it forequipment certified for home use.

jjieta

1

jjieta

2

Notices 255

Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A Statement

Taiwan Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Taiwan Contact InformationIBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Info:IBM Taiwan Corporation3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei TaiwanTel: 0800-016-888

Australia and New Zealand Class A StatementAttention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this productmight cause radio interference in which case the user might be required to takeadequate measures.

ruse

mi


Index

Numerics2101 Model N00 1752101 Model N42 1767014 model T00 rack 1777014 model T42 rack 178

Aabout this document

how to send your comments xxviiiAC power line sizes 169active/active configurations 7adapter support 6adapter, DB-9 to RJ-45 console 117adapters

optional cardsN3600 187N5200 and N5500 193N5300 and N5600 201N6000 series system 211N6200 series system 221N7000 series 229

Advanced Single Instance Storage 90ASCII terminal console connection 116, 117attention notice xvaudience xxiiiAutoSupport 167

Ccables

labeling 164measuring 164planning 163

caution notices xvdefinition xvexamples xv

CFO 90CIFS protocol 89clearance dimensions 137, 150, 153

EXN1000 storage expansion unit 148N3300 storage system 119N3400 storage system 119N3600 storage system 119N3700 storage system 131N5200 storage system 133N5300 storage system 133N5500 storage system 133N5600 storage system 133N6210 storage system 142N6240 storage system 142N7600 storage system 145N7700 storage system 145N7800 storage system 145N7900 storage system 145

clustering 7Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables 163

commentssending xxviii

connectionsASCII terminal console 116, 117console 117gateway to external storage 5, 30, 36, 44, 51, 77,

82storage expansion unit to N series filers 4storage expansion unit to other storage expansion

units 4storage expansion units to an N series system 3

conventionscommand xxviiformatting xxviiikeyboard xxviii

Ddanger notices xiii

definition xiiiexample xiii

Data ONTAP 5, 89Data ONTAP 7.1

documentation 248Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library 249Data ONTAP 7.2

documentation 247Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3 gateway systems library 249Data ONTAP 7.3

documentation 246Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode

documentation 246DB-9 to RJ-45

console adapter 117pin connections 117

disk sanitization 90documentation

Data ONTAP 7.1 248Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway 249Data ONTAP 7.2 247Data ONTAP 7.2 and 7.3 gateway 249Data ONTAP 7.3 246Data ONTAP 8.0 7-Mode 246EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion

units 245IBM System Storage N series 244improvement xxviiiN series-related documents 250N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage systems 245N3700 storage system 245N5000 series systems 245N6000 series systems 245N7000 series systems 245


Eelectrical requirements 153

EXN1000 storage expansion unit 149, 150EXN2000 storage expansion unit 151, 152EXN4000 storage expansion unit 152, 153N3300 storage system 120N3400 storage system 120N3600 storage system 120N3700 storage system 132N5200 storage system 135N5300 storage system 135N5500 storage system 136N5600 storage system 136N6040 138N6040 with PAM cards 139N6060 140N6060 with PAM cards 140, 141N6070 141N6070 with PAM cards 142N6210 144N6240 144, 145N7600 147N7700 147N7800 148N7900 148SAS drives 155SATA drives 155

electrical requirements with Performance AcceleratorModule cards

N5300 storage system 135N5600 storage system 136N7600 storage system 147N7700 storage system 147N7800 storage system 148N7900 storage system 148

environmentalnotices xiii

environmental requirements 137, 153EXN1000 storage expansion unit 148N3300 storage system 119N3400 storage system 119N3600 storage system 119N3700 storage system 131N5200 storage system 133N5300 storage system 133N5500 storage system 133N5600 storage system 133N6210 storage system 142N6240 storage system 142N7600 storage system 145N7700 storage system 145N7800 storage system 145N7900 storage system 145

Ethernet adapter support 6EXN1000 storage expansion unit

hardware features 83hardware specifications 148power cords 171support 2

EXN1000 storage expansion unitsmixing 3

EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion unitslibrary 245

EXN2000 storage expansion unithardware features 85hardware specifications 150power cords 171support 2


EXN3000 storage expansion unithardware features 86hardware specifications 153support 2


EXN4000 storage expansion unithardware features 87hardware specifications 150power cords 171support 2


FFCP protocol 89features

EXN1000hardware 84

EXN2000hardware 85

EXN3000hardware 87

EXN4000hardware 88

host software 106N3300 storage system

hardware 9, 12N3400 storage system



hardware 20, 23N5200 filer

hardware 23, 27N5200 gateway







hardware 50, 52


features (continued)N6040

hardware 52, 56, 61N6060

hardware 57N6070

hardware 61, 65N6210

hardware 66N6210 and N6240

hardware 69N6240



hardware 79, 82power cords 171software 98support xxiii

filer, defined xxviFilerView 89fire suppression xxiFlexCache for NFS 90FlexClone 90FlexVol 89floor loading, T00 rack 180floor loading, T42 rack 180floor plan considerations 160floor-loading specifications 160FRU/CRU list

feature codes 171

Ggateway

connecting to external storage 5, 30, 36, 44, 51,77, 82

gateway, defined xxvigeneral considerations 159

Hhardware service and support xxvhardware specifications 137

EXN1000 storage expansion unit 148EXN2000 storage expansion unit 150EXN3000 storage expansion unit 153EXN4000 storage expansion unit 150N3300 storage system 119N3600 storage system 119N3700 storage system 131N5200 storage system 133N5300 storage system 133N5500 storage system 133N5600 storage system 133N6210 storage system 142N6240 storage system 142N7600 storage system 145N7700 storage system 145N7800 storage system 145

hardware specifications (continued)N7900 storage system 145

high availability configurations 7host software features 106how to send your comments xxviii

IIBM safety information 250Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables 163input power considerations 159inspection, safety xviiinstallation

rack xviiinteroperability 6iSCSI protocol 89, 90

Llabels, safety xivlaser safety xviload board, N3700 20

MMetroCluster 90Microsoft Exchange Bundle 91MultiStore 91

NN series

related documents 250N series documentation 244N series storage system software 89N00 rack specifications 175N3300 storage system

clearance dimensions 119electrical requirements 120environmental requirements 119features

hardware 9hardware specifications 119noise emission notes 120physical characteristics 119power cords 171

N3300, N3400 and N3600 storage systems library 245N3400 storage system

clearance dimensions 119electrical requirements 120environmental requirements 119features

hardware 13noise emission notes 120physical characteristics 119

N3600 storage systemadapter support 6clearance dimensions 119electrical requirements 120environmental requirements 119

Index 259

N3600 storage system (continued)features

hardware 16hardware specifications 119noise emission notes 120physical characteristics 119power cords 171

N3700 storage systemcabling to storage expansion units 21clearance dimensions 131differences between early and current CPU module

designs 21electrical requirements 132environmental requirements 131features

hardware 20hardware specifications 131load board 20noise emission notes 132physical characteristics 131power cords 171

N3700 storage system library 245N42 rack specifications 176N5000 series systems library 245N5200 filer

featureshardware 23

raw storage capacity 26N5200 gateway

featureshardware 28

N5200 storage systemadapter support 6clearance dimensions 133electrical requirements 135environmental requirements 133hardware specifications 133noise emission notes 134physical characteristics 133power cords 171

N5300 filerfeatures

hardware 30N5300 gateway

featureshardware 35

N5300 storage systemadapter support 6clearance dimensions 133electrical requirements 135electrical requirements with one Performance

Accelerator Module card 135environmental requirements 133hardware specifications 133noise emission notes 134physical characteristics 133power cords 171raw storage capacity 32

N5500 filerfeatures

hardware 37

N5500 gatewayfeatures

hardware 42N5500 storage system

adapter support 6clearance dimensions 133electrical requirements 136environmental requirements 133hardware specifications 133noise emission notes 134physical characteristics 133power cords 171raw storage capacity 40

N5600 filerfeatures

hardware 45N5600 gateway

featureshardware 50

N5600 storage systemadapter support 6clearance dimensions 133electrical requirements 136electrical requirements with two Performance

Accelerator Module cards 136environmental requirements 133hardware specifications 133noise emission notes 134physical characteristics 133power cords 171raw storage capacity 47

N6000 series systems library 245N6040

featureshardware 52

N6040 storage systemraw storage capacity 55

N6060features


raw storage capacity 59N6070

featureshardware 61

N6070 storage systemraw storage capacity 64

N6210features


clearance dimensions 142environmental requirements 142hardware specifications 142physical characteristics 142raw storage capacity 68

N6240features


clearance dimensions 142


N6240 storage system (continued)environmental requirements 142hardware specifications 142physical characteristics 142raw storage capacity 72

N7000 series systems library 245N7600 storage system

clearance dimensions 145electrical requirements with four Performance

Accelerator Module I or II cards 147environmental requirements 145hardware specifications 145noise emission notes 147physical characteristics 145

N7700 filerfeatures


adapter support 6clearance dimensions 145electrical requirements with four Performance

Accelerator Module I or II cards 147environmental requirements 145hardware specifications 145noise emission notes 147physical characteristics 145power cords 171raw storage capacity 76

N7800 storage systemclearance dimensions 145electrical requirements with five Performance

Accelerator Module I or II cards 148environmental requirements 145hardware specifications 145noise emission notes 147physical characteristics 145

N7900 filerfeatures


adapter support 6clearance dimensions 145electrical requirements with five Performance

Accelerator Module I or II cards 148environmental requirements 145hardware specifications 145noise emission notes 147physical characteristics 145power cords 171raw storage capacity 81

NearStore 91NFS protocol 89noise emission notes

EXN1000 storage expansion unit 149EXN2000 storage expansion unit 151EXN4000 storage expansion unit 151N3300 storage system 120N3400 storage system 120N3600 storage system 120N3700 storage system 132N5200 storage system 134

noise emission notes (continued)N5300 storage system 134N5500 storage system 134N5600 storage system 134N7600 storage system 147N7700 storage system 147N7800 storage system 147N7900 storage system 147

notices 251attention xvcaution xvdanger xiiisafety xviiisafety and environmental xiiitypes xiiiused in this document xxiv

OOpen Systems SnapVault Agents 106Operation Manager Core (OMC) 106optical port terminators xvioptional adapter cards

descriptionsN3600 187N5200 and N5500 193N5300 and N5600 201N6000 series system 211N6200 series system 221N7000 series 229

overview, planning 1

PPCI-Express (PCIe) adapters 231PCI-X adapters

optional 229physical characteristics 137, 153

EXN1000 storage expansion unit 148EXN2000 storage expansion unit 150EXN4000 storage expansion unit 150N3300 storage system 119N3400 storage system 119N3600 storage system 119N3700 storage system 131N5200 storage system 133N5300 storage system 133N5500 storage system 133N5600 storage system 133N6210 storage system 142N6240 storage system 142N7600 storage system 145N7700 storage system 145N7800 storage system 145N7900 storage system 145

physical planning 1, 111planning 1, 111power cords 157, 171

feature codes 171power supplies and power requirements 157Protection Manager 106, 107

Index 261

Provisioning Manager 107

Rrack installation

safety xviirack mount requirements 88, 157rack relocation xx

safety xxrack safety xviirack specifications

for IBM products installed in a non-IBM rack 184general 181IBM 2101 Model N00 175IBM 2101 Model N42 176IBM 7014 177

reader feedbacksending xxviii

restrictions, usage xvi

Ssafety

environmental notices xiiiinspection procedure xviilabels xiiilaser xvinotices xiii, xviiirack xviirack installation xviirack relocation xx

safety labels xivsafety requirements for non-IBM rack 184security 161Single Mailbox Recovery 107site planning 1, 111SMBR Administrative Server 107SMBR Content Analysis Wizard 107SnapDrive 107SnapLock Compliance 91SnapLock Enterprise 91SnapManager for Exchange 91, 107SnapManager for Hyper V 108SnapManager for Hyper-V 91SnapManager for Oracle 91, 108SnapManager for Oracle for Windows 108SnapManager for SAP 91SnapManager for SharePoint 92SnapManager for SQL 92, 107SnapManager for VI 92, 108SnapMirror 92SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle 92SnapMover 92SnapRestore 92SnapShot 89SnapValidator 92SnapVault Primary 93SnapVault Secondary 93software features 98software, N series storage system 89specifications for the N series storage system 111

storage expansion unit cablingdifferences between early and current N3700 CPU

module designs 22storage expansion units

cabling requirements 4connecting to an N series system 3connecting to N series filers 4connecting to other storage expansion units 4connecting to the N3700 22connecting to the N5200 filer 26connecting to the N5300 filer 32connecting to the N5500 filer 40connecting to the N5600 filer 46connecting to the N6040 54connecting to the N6060 59connecting to the N6070 63connecting to the N6210 68connecting to the N6240 72connecting to the N7700 filer 76connecting to the N7900 filer 81mixing 3support 2

support for Ethernet adapters 6supported features xxiiiSyncMirror 93

TT00 and T42 rack caster location 178T00 and T42 rack service clearances 178T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments 179T00 rack weight distribution and floor loading 180T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading 180tasks by document title 244terminators

optical ports xviterminology xxvithermal considerations 159third-party devices

connection differences between early and currentN3700 CPU module designs 22

Uusage restrictions xvi

Wweb sites, related xxvweight distribution, T00 rack 180weight distribution, T42 rack 180Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) 5


��

Printed in USA

GA32-0543-22

ga32 0543 20 ibm system n intro and planning guide

Documents